2009 Chevrolet Avalanche Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the
names AVALANCHE and Z71 are registered trademarks
of General Motors Corporation.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de ce guide en français
auprès de concessionnaire ou à l’adresse suivante:
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division
wherever it appears in this manual.
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
This manual describes features that may or may not be
on your specific vehicle.
Index
Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about
the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols,
and words work together to explain vehicle operation.
To quickly locate information about the vehicle use the
Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number where
it can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15911388 A First Printing
©2008 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
symbol which means “Do
Not,” “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
Many times, this damage would not be covered by the
vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. The notice
tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which use
the same words, CAUTION or Notice.
A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about
things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore
the warning.
Vehicle Symbols
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
{ CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
M : This symbol is shown when you need to see your
owner manual for additional instructions or information.
* : This symbol is shown when you need to see a
service manual for additional instructions or information.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Symbol Chart
+ : Fuses
Here are some additional symbols that may be found on
the vehicle and what they mean. For more information
on the symbol, refer to the index.
i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
j : LATCH System Child Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
0 : Adjustable Pedals
9 : Airbag Readiness Light
# : Air Conditioning
g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
} : Power
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar®
$ : Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
_ : Tow/Haul Mode
I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
F : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gage
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the
outboard seating positions.
{ CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a
crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head
restraint, press the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the restraint down.
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The head restraints are not designed to be removed.
The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted
up and down.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved
forward or rearward.
Power Seats
1. Lift the bar to unlock
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to
operate them are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your
vehicle’s power seat:
Manual Lumbar
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by
moving the front of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by
moving the rear of the control up or down.
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire
control up or down.
On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is
located behind the power seat control on the outboard
side of the seats. See “Power Reclining Seatbacks”
A vehicle with a memory function allows seat settings to
be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors,
On vehicles with this feature the control is located on
the outboard side of the seat.
Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the
knob forward or rearward.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may have additional features to adjust your
vehicle’s power seat:
Power Lumbar
• To raise the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the top of the control.
• To lower the height of the lumbar support, press
and hold the bottom of the control.
Release the control when the lower seatback reaches
the desired level of lumbar support.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows
seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory
information.
Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as
it may during long trips, so should the position of
your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.
On seats with power lumbar, the controls used to
operate this feature are located on the outboard side of
the seats.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold the
front of the control.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the
rear of the control.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ (Cooled Seat): To cool the entire seat, press the
button with the cooled seat symbol.
Heated Seats
On vehicles with heated front seats, the controls are
located on the driver and passenger doors.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the cooled seat off. Indicator bars next to
the symbol designate the level of cooling selected: three
for high, two for medium, and one for low.
I (Heated Seatback): Press to turn on the heated
seatback.
J (Heated Seat and Seatback): Press to turn on the
heated seat and seatback.
+ (Heated Seatback): To heat only the seatback,
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through
the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and
to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights will
show the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
press the button with the heated seatback symbol.
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the heated seatback off. Indicator bars
next to the symbol designate the level of heat selected:
three for high, two for medium, and one for low.
The heated seats will be canceled 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off. To use the heated seat feature
after restarting the vehicle, press the heated seat
or seatback button again.
z (Heated Seat and Seatback): To heat the entire
seat, press the button with the heated seat and seatback
symbol.
Heated and Cooled Seats
This symbol will appear on the climate control display to
indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium, and
low and to turn the heated seat off. Indicator bars next to
the symbol designate the level of heat selected: three for
high, two for medium, and one for low.
If the front seats have the heated and cooled seat
feature, the buttons used to control this feature
are located on the front doors near the door handle.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heated and cooled seats will be canceled after the
ignition is turned off. To use the heated and cooled
seat feature after the vehicle is started, you will need to
press the appropriate seat button again.
To save seating positions in memory:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and
the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable
position.
Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-35
for more information.
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
The controls for this
feature are located on the
driver’s door panel, and
are used to program
and recall memory settings
for the driver’s seat,
outside mirrors, and the
adjustable throttle and
brake pedal.
Not all mirrors, adjustable throttles and brake
pedals, or power lumbar will have the ability to save
and recall their positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to
indicate that the position has been stored.
A second seating, lumbar, mirror, and throttle and brake
pedal position can be programmed by repeating the
above steps and pressing button 2.
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press and release either button 1 or button 2
corresponding to the desired driving position. The
seat, outside mirrors, and adjustable throttle and brake
pedals will move to the position previously stored.
You will hear a single beep.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to enter
your vehicle and the remote recall memory feature
is on, automatic seat, adjustable mirror, and adjustable
pedal movements will occur. See “MEMORY SEAT
RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Easy Exit Seat
The control for this feature is located on the driver’s
door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exit
position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. You
will hear a single beep, and the driver’s seat will
move back.
To stop recall movement of the memory function at any
time, press one of the power seat controls, memory
buttons, power mirror buttons, or adjustable pedal switch.
If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement
will occur when the key is removed from the ignition.
See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle
more information.
If something has blocked the driver’s seat and/or the
adjustable pedals while recalling a memory position, the
driver’s seat and/or the adjustable pedals recall may
stop working. If this happens, remove the obstruction
and press the appropriate control for the area that is not
responding for two seconds. Try recalling the memory
position again by pressing the appropriate memory
button. If the memory position is still not recalling, see
your dealer for service.
The memory seat and easy exit features can also be
programmed using the DIC.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you
do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
{ CAUTION:
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION:
On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever
used to operate them is located on the outboard side of
the seat(s).
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the
belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones.
This could cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift the recline lever.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do the
following:
Power Reclining Seatbacks
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control
used to recline them is located on the outboard side
of the seat behind the power seat control.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control
rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the
control forward.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold either side of the seat do the following:
Center Seat
1. Push the rear seat head restraints all the
way down.
Your vehicle may have a front center seat. The seatback
doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for
the driver and passenger when the center seat is
not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the
seatback is folded down.
2. Pull the seat loop
located where the
seatback and
seat cushion meet. The
seat cushion will
release and allow you
to tilt it toward the
front of the vehicle.
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
The rear seat is a 60/40 split bench seat that can be
folded to give you more cargo space and access to the
more information on operation of the folding midgate.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly
attached, or twisted will not provide the protection
needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the safety
belts are properly routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
{ CAUTION:
3. Fold the seatback forward until it is flat. You
may have to move the front seats forward slightly
to do this.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always be
sure to press the rear of the seat cushion down.
This action locks the seatback in place.
4. Repeat the procedure for the other side.
To return the seats to the normal position, push the
seatback up and fold the seat cushion down.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked.
Raise the head restraint.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{ CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
People riding on the tailgate (if equipped) can
easily lose their balance and fall even when the
vehicle is operated at low speeds. Falling from a
moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or
death.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{ CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot
be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the
injuries can be much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the
vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten
your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s)
are restrained properly too.
{ CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on
wheels.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About Safety
Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I
am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
This section is only for people of adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in a
crash — even one that is not your fault — you and
your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones
and you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is
too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too
much, which could increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too
loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled
in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt
would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces
would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This
could cause serious internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over
an armrest like this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The
belt force would then be applied on the abdomen,
not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes
under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also,
the belt would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal organs like your
liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing the
lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body
could move too far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a
crash, you would not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make
it straight so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder
belt except for the center front passenger position, if
the vehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt
on page 1-35 for more information.
The following instructions explain how to wear a
lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can
sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If
you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle.
If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt is pulled
out all the way, the child restraint locking feature
may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If
the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-37.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature may
affect the passenger sensing system. See
information.
Position the release button on the buckle so that the
safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this
section for instructions on use and important safety
information.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling the safety belt until it
can be buckled.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The
belt should return to its stowed position.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety
belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the
lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of
the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt,
damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the
driver and right front passenger positions.
This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the
safety belt assembly. They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe
frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, if
the vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side
crash or a rollover event.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt
is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away
from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
Squeeze the buttons (A)
on the sides of the height
adjuster and move the
height adjuster to the
desired position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners
activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the vehicle’s safety
belt system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
The adjuster can be moved up just by pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide.
After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to
move it down without squeezing the buttons to
make sure it has locked into position.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
side of the seat.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two
edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that the safety belt can be
removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage
clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the
side of the seat.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Lap Belt
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a
You vehicle may have a center seating position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender
on page 1-37.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the
buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure
that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the
buckle.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Extender
Child Restraints
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should
use it.
Older Children
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear,
so the extender will be long enough for you. To help
avoid personal injury, do not let someone else use
it, and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The
extender has been designed for adults. Never use it for
securing child seats. To wear it, attach it to the
regular safety belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It
should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in
a crash.
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend
at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt
rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try
using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder
shoulder belt still does not rest on the shoulder,
then return to the booster seat.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue. If no, return to
the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
length of trip? If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a position
with a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear the same safety
belt. The safety belt can not properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one person at a time.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the
shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could
move too far forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{ CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave
children unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them. Every time
infants and young children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by appropriate child
restraints.
Children who are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a
vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it
during a crash. For example, in a crash at only
25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) infant will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a
person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
Never do this.
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the
right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint
in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a
forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the
right front seat, always move the front passenger
seat as far back as it will go.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{ CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
To reduce the risk of neck and head injury during
a crash, infants need complete support. This is
because an infant’s neck is not fully developed
and its head weighs so much compared with the
rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing child restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants should always be secured in
rear-facing child restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides restraint
with the seating surface
against the back of
the infant.
A young child’s hip bones are still so small that
the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain
low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash,
young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a
crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides restraint
for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so
if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy
from the manufacturer.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child restraint is not properly secured in the
vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the
vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came with
that child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash
if the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child properly following the
instructions that came with that child restraint.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where to Put the Restraint
CAUTION: (Continued)
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position.
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
We recommend that children and child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
{ CAUTION:
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH
system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on
the child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system.
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure
the child restraint. A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether and anchor.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure
the child restraint properly.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you
with instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Top Tether Anchor
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
The right side rear passenger and center seating
positions have exposed metal anchors located in the
crease between the seatback and the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located near the top
tether anchors.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask
the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with top
tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower
anchors.
Rear Seat
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to accident statistics, children and infants are
safer when properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system secured in a rear
seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-48 for additional information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{ CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to
anchors, the child restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the child
could be seriously injured or killed. Install a
LATCH-type child restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions that came
with the child restraint and the instructions in this
manual.
The top tether anchors are located on the back of the
rear seat frame above the floor for each rear seating
position. Fold down the rear seatback(s) to access the
Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of
the vehicle as the seating position where the child
restraint will be placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether must
be attached.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH attachments rub
against the vehicle’s safety belts. This may damage
these parts. If necessary, move buckled safety
belts to avoid rubbing the LATCH attachments.
{ CAUTION:
Do not attach more than one child restraint to a
single anchor. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose or even break during
a crash. A child or others could be injured. To
reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor.
Do not fold the empty rear seat with a safety belt
buckled. This could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the safety belt to its
stowed position, before folding the seat.
1. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach the top tether to
the top tether anchor, if there is one. Refer to
the child restraint instructions and the following
steps:
1.1. To access the top tether anchors, raise the
seat cushion by pulling up on the strap loop
at the rear of the seat cushion and fold
the seat cushion forward. Then fold
the seatback forward until it is flat. See Rear
information.
{ CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a
shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any
unused safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if
your vehicle has one, after the child restraint has
been installed.
1.2. Place the child restraint in the vehicle, near
the seating position that you are using.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3. Route the top tether according to your child
restraint instructions and the following
instructions:
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
1.4. Attach the top tether attachment to the top
tether anchor.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Attach the lower attachments to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have lower
{ CAUTION:
attachments or the desired seating position does
not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint
with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer
to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and
the instructions in this manual.
If either seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they
are locked.
2.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
2.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments on
the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1.5. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward.
Then lower the seat cushion until the
seatback and the seat cushion lock into
position.
3. Tighten the top tether.
4. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position,
study the instructions that came with the child restraint to
make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in
the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-49 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
If the child restraint manufacturer recommends using a
top tether, attach and tighten the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions that came
with the child restraint and see Lower Anchors and
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety
belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{ CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front seat
can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags
if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the
center front seat. It is always better to secure a
child restraint in a rear seat.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position.
If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
CAUTION: (Continued)
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to
secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing system
which is designed to turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger
including important safety information.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
additional information.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower
page 1-49 for how and where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is secured using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
top tether anchor locations.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the
top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Position the release button on the buckle so that
the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started.
page 3-33.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. When installing a
forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to
use your knee to push down on the child restraint as
you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
page 1-70 for more information.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the
middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
Airbag System
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
The vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
The vehicle may have the following airbags:
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and
the person seated directly behind the right front
passenger.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily
close to the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning forward.
Safety belts help keep you in position before and
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back as
possible while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if
you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you
have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with
safety belts, but do not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash.
In some crashes safety belts are your only
page 1-67.
Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things inside the
vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are
“supplemental restraints” to the safety belts.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against the
door or side windows in seating positions with
roof-rail airbags.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
{ CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or
killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
protection for adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint system
can provide. Always secure children properly in
page 1-41.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the steering
wheel hub or on or near any other airbag
covering.
Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with
roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If you do,
the path of an inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right
front passenger, and second row outboard passengers,
they are in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags.
intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes.
In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail
airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the
system’s designed threshold level. The threshold level
can vary with specific vehicle design.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object does not deform.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Roof-rail airbags are not intended to inflate in rear
impacts. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck or if the sensing system
predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or in
a severe frontal impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all part of
the airbag module.
Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables
the sensing system to monitor the position of the
driver’s seat. The seat position sensor provides
information that is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows that
have occupant seating positions.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For roof-rail airbags,
deployment is determined by the location and severity of
the side impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag
deployment is determined by the direction of the roll.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety
belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help
contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being
able to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems for
people with a history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle
should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If
you have breathing problems but cannot get out of
the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh
air by opening a window or a door. If you
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
experience breathing problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek medical attention.
After the frontal airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not even realize an
airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after they deploy. Some
components of the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see
The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the
hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off, and
turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position. The passenger airbag
status indicator will be visible on the overhead console
when the vehicle is started.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for the vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• The vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check. When
the system check is complete, either the word ON
or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbag and the roof-rail airbags (if equipped)
are not affected by the passenger sensing system.
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
CAUTION: (Continued)
very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag
inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward
position.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when
properly secured in a rear seat in the correct child
restraint for their weight and size.
Even if the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat,
always move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child restraint
in a rear seat.
{ CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This is because the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines an infant is present in a
child restraint.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
{ CAUTION:
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult
size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed
the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and
stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children, including children in child restraints,
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing
system may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for that
person.
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the
vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback
and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to
make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing
the child restraint into the seat cushion.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 1-2.
2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle.
3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as
blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle.
4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions
provided by the child restraint manufacturer and
The passenger sensing system may or may not
turn off the airbag for a child in a child restraint
depending upon the child’s seating posture
and body build. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
1-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this happens, use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and enable the right front
passenger frontal airbag:
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an
Adult-Size Occupant
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or
seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in
this position for two to three minutes after the on
indicator is lit.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
1-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when approved by GM for
your specific vehicle. See Adding Equipment to Your
information about modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
Additional Factors Affecting System
Operation
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
The on indicator may be lit if an object, such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device, is put on an unoccupied seat. If this is
not desired remove the object from the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the
way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged.
This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing
system to turn the airbag off for some adult size
occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the
way and start again.
{ CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger seat or
between the passenger seat cushion and seatback
may interfere with the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket or
cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
1-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
{ CAUTION:
Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-15.
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off
and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still
inflate during improper service. You can be injured
if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service
procedures, and make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
1-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could
also interfere with the operation of the passenger
sensing system. This could either prevent
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or
prevent the passenger sensing system from
properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
If you have any questions, call Customer
A: Yes. If you add things that change the vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, overhead console, front
sensors, side impact sensors, rollover sensor
module, or airbag wiring can affect the operation of
the airbag system.
Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for
Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
If the vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
In addition, the vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger position, which
includes sensors that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing system may not
operate properly if the original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery or trim, or with
GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket
seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device,
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
1-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-32 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly. Do
not open or break the airbag coverings. If there are
any opened or broken airbag covers, have the
airbag covering and/or airbag module replaced. For
the location of the airbag modules, see What
dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, check the safety belt reminder light,
safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn
or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash.
They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn
or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system and it was being
used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
safety belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was
not being used at the time of the crash.
{ CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in your
vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not
properly protect the person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a crash. To help
make sure your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected and
any necessary replacements made as soon as
possible.
Have the safety belt pretensioners checked if the
vehicle has been in a crash, if the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is started, or while you are
If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new
safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have the safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key
is dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function with the keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the
path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key can be used for the ignition, all door locks,
tailgate, and side storage boxes.
See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or
additional key is needed.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or
snowy weather.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly, see
your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician for
service.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
feature, press / to start the engine from outside the
vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions
work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors, including the
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
tailgate.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC),
the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking
has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn
chirps when Q is pressed again within three seconds of
the previous press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle
additional information.
Pressing Q arms the content theft-deterrent system.
K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door.
If K is pressed again within three seconds, all
remaining doors, including the tailgate, unlock. The
interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20 seconds
or until the ignition is turned on.
With Remote Start
(Without Remote Start
Similar)
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If enabled through the DIC, the turn signal lamps flash
twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC
If enabled through the DIC, the exterior lights turn on
briefly if it is dark enough outside. See “APPROACH
LIGHTING” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
Programming Transmitters to the
Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will
work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased and programmed through your
dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmitters
must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter
is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to eight
transmitters programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote
Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
on how to match RKE transmitters to your vehicle.
Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent
on page 2-28.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and release
to locate the vehicle. The turn signal lamps flash and
the horn sounds three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds to
activate the panic alarm. The turn signal lamps flash
and the horn sounds repeatedly for 30 seconds.
The alarm turns off when the ignition is moved to
Battery Replacement
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays in the DIC. See
“REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC
information.
ON/RUN or L is pressed again. The ignition must be
in LOCK/OFF for the panic alarm to work.
Notice: When replacing the battery, do not touch
any of the circuitry on the transmitter. Static
from your body could damage the transmitter.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This
feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the
vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or
air conditioning systems and rear window defogger.
Normal operation of the system will return after the key
is turned to the ON/RUN position.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system,
the climate control system will default to a heating or
cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle
was set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an automatic
climate control system and heated seats, the heated
seats will turn on during colder outside temperatures and
will shut off when the key is turned to ON/RUN. If
your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control
system, during remote start, you will need to manually
turn the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
on page 1-7 for additional information.
To replace the battery:
1. Separate the transmitter with a flat, thin object
inserted into the notch on the side.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Snap the transmitter back together.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may require a
person using the remote start to have the vehicle in
view when doing so. Check local regulations for
any requirements on remote starting of vehicles.
/ (Remote Start): This button will be on the RKE
transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicle is low
on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock button. The
vehicle’s doors will lock. Immediately press and
hold the transmitter’s remote start button until the
turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the
vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote start
button for two to four seconds. Pressing the remote
start button again after the vehicle has started
will turn the engine off.
If your vehicle has the remote start feature, the RKE
transmitter functions will have an increased range
of operation. However, the range may be less while the
vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote Keyless
information.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn
on and remain on while the vehicle is running.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically shut
off after 10 minutes unless a time extension has
been done.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle
has been driven, repeat these steps, while the
engine is still running, to extend the engine running
time by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended
one time.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert
and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the
ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an
emission control system malfunction and the check
engine light comes on.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press
the remote start button until the parking lamps
turn off.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote vehicle
start if the coolant temperature gets too high or if the oil
pressure gets low.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature are
shipped from the factory with the remote vehicle
start system enabled. The system may be enabled or
disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START” under
page 3-67 for additional information. If your vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, see your dealer/retailer to
enable or disable the remote vehicle start system.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate times
between driving sequences. The engine will run for
10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote start time
frame, and before the engine stops.
For example, if the lock button and then the remote
start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle
has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are
added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes.
Remote Start Ready
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle start
feature, it may have the remote start ready feature. This
feature allows your dealer/retailer to add the
The additional ten minutes are considered a second
remote vehicle start.
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with
one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be
started with the key. After the key is removed from
the ignition, the vehicle can be remote started again.
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add the
manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to your
vehicle.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock the doors.
Doors and Locks
To lock or unlock the door from the outside, use
the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter or the key.
Door Locks
To lock or unlock the door from the inside, slide the
manual lever up or down, or use the power door locks
switch.
{ CAUTION:
Power Door Locks
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
On vehicles with power door locks the switches are
located on the front doors.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
" (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors.
Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press
to lock the doors.
• Young children who get into unlocked vehicles
may be unable to get out. A child can be
overcome by extreme heat and can suffer
permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Always lock your vehicle whenever
you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Locking
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a door
is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last
door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that
the delayed locking feature is in use.
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature enable
you to program the vehicle’s power door locks. You can
program this feature through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
programming.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on the
RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking
feature and immediately lock all the doors.
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back on
again by doing the following:
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in the
lock position.
2. Press unlock twice on the RKE transmitter.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can also program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Door Lock Delay” under
page 3-67.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the locks, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the horizontal position.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from
the inside.
2. Close the door.
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door.
1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock,
using the power door lock switch, or the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle
has one.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it
so the slot is in the vertical position.
The rear doors must be open to access them. The
label showing lock and unlock positions is located near
the lock.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
Midgate®
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door
is open.
{ CAUTION:
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo area
covered and the tailgate and the Midgate® open
because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come
into your vehicle. You can not see or smell CO. It
can cause unconsciousness and even death. If
you must drive with the cargo covers on and the
tailgate and Midgate® open or if electrical wiring or
other cable connections must pass through the
seal between the body and the Midgate®:
• Make sure all windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed on the setting that
brings in outside air. This will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Dual Automatic Climate
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way. See
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following are the main components of the Midgate®
system:
Midgate® Operation
Your vehicle is equipped with a Midgate® and a
removable rear glass panel. The Midgate® allows you to
extend the length of your vehicle’s cargo area.
A. Latch Levers
B. Grab Handles
C. Glass-Catch
E. Window Retaining Tabs
F. Midgate® Release
Handle
Release Button G. Window Alignment
D. Glass Lock
Knobs
Arrows
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the rear glass do the following:
Rear Glass Removal and Storage
page 1-13 for more information. The front seats
may have to be moved forward slightly to allow the
rear seats to fold completely.
{ CAUTION:
Although the rear glass can be removed without
folding the rear seats, you will not be able to access
the rear glass storage pocket. Be sure to fold the
seats before removing the rear glass.
If the removable rear glass is not stored properly,
it could be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or
sudden maneuver. People in the vehicle could be
injured. Whenever you store the rear glass in the
vehicle, always be sure that it is stored securely in
the Midgate® storage pocket.
Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster is
on. If you remove the rear glass with the rear defroster
on, you may see a discharge spark coming from
the latch area.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located
near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch.
Once unlatched, the glass-catch release button (C)
will catch the rear glass and prevent it from
falling forward.
3. While holding the rear glass in place, press the
glass-catch release button (C) and pull the top of
the rear glass toward you using the grab
handle(s) (B) located at the top of the rear glass.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. With the rear glass tilted toward you, lift it out from
the lower window frame channel. Use the grab
handles to assist you in removing the rear glass.
5. Load the rear glass into the storage pocket in the
Midgate®, guiding the lower edge of the rear glass
behind the three rear glass retaining tabs (E).
Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket,
with grab handles facing you, until the next step.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once both glass lock knobs are in the locked
position, the rear glass is securely stored.
6. Turn both glass lock knobs (D), located at both top
corners of the storage pocket, to the locked
position. Push in on the corner of the rear glass to
allow the lock knob to engage more easily.
7. Push both latch levers up to the locked position.
You should hear a click when each latch lever
locks correctly.
The rear seats can be returned to the normal
position when the rear glass is out and stored
properly in the storage pocket.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reinstalling the Rear Glass
To reinstall the rear glass, do the following:
1. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located
near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch.
4. With the rear glass tilted at an angle, place the
bottom edge in the lower channel of the window
frame.
2. Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and turn
the glass lock knobs, located at both top corners of
the glass storage pocket, to the unlocked position.
3. Pull the rear glass out from the storage pocket using
the grab handles.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Be sure to align the rear
glass side-to-side using
the alignment arrows (G).
5. Apply a firm downward pressure and then push the
rear glass flat against the window frame. Use the
grab handles at the top of the rear glass to
assist you.
6. Push the rear glass flat against the window frame
and push each latch lever up until it locks. You
should hear a click when each latch lever locks
correctly.
Lowering the Midgate® with the Rear
Glass in Place
The Midgate® can be lowered to allow the cargo area of
your vehicle to extend into the cab. The rear glass
can be either installed in its normal position, or it can be
removed and stored in the rear glass storage pocket.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lower the Midgate®, do the following:
1. Fold the rear seats. The front seats might have to
be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to
more information.
3. Lower the Midgate® until it is flat.
Rear Glass in Normal Position
2. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the Midgate®
securely so it does not fall forward. Turn the
Midgate® handle clockwise and pull the Midgate®
toward you.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lowering the Midgate® with the Rear
Glass in the Storage Pocket
MidgateLowered with Crossbar Attached
This procedure works the same as the procedure
described previously, but when you lower the Midgate®
with the rear glass in the stored position, you will
notice that the entire crossbar will lower with the
Midgate®. This is completely normal; however, since the
crossbar lowers with the Midgate®, it will be heavier.
As you lower the Midgate® be ready for the extra weight
and do not let the Midgate® fall as you lower it.
Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Raising the Midgate®
Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or
power door lock switch to lock and unlock the tailgate.
To return the Midgate® to its normal position, raise the
Midgate® up with a firm swinging motion until it
latches into place securely. This will help to ensure that
the Midgate® closes with enough force to engage
the latches.
Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling
the tailgate toward you.
To shut the tailgate, push it firmly upward until it
latches. Push and pull on the tailgate to be sure it is
latched securely.
If the rear glass is removed and you would like to put it
back, do so using the instructions given previously.
Tailgate Removal
The tailgate is not to be removed. This may cause
damage to electrical connector resulting in loss
of lock/unlock and rear vision camera function.
Tailgate
{ CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride on the tailgate,
even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds.
People riding on the tailgate can easily lose their
balance and fall in response to vehicle maneuvers.
Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious
injuries or death. Do not allow people to ride on
the tailgate. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt properly.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The switch used to disable
the power assist steps is
located on the center
console below the climate
control system.
Power Assist Steps
Your vehicle may have power assist steps.
The power assist steps automatically extend from
beneath the vehicle on the side in which the door has
been opened. Once the door is closed, the assist steps
automatically move back under the vehicle after a
brief delay. The vehicle must not be moving for the
assist steps to extend or retract.
The assist steps cannot be disabled in the extended
position.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat and
suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat
stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows
closed in warm or hot weather.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power window
controls are located on
each of the side doors.
Power Windows
{ CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or others
could be badly injured or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do
not leave keys in a vehicle with children.
Driver’s Side shown
The driver’s door also has switches that control the
passenger and rear windows. The power windows work
when the ignition has been turned to ACC/ACCESSORY,
ON/RUN or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
page 2-34.
When there are children in the rear seat use the
window lockout button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Windows
Sun Visors
Windows with an express-down feature allow the
windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press
down fully on the window switch, then release, to
activate the express-down mode. The express-down
mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the
front edge of the switch.
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side
to cover the driver or passenger side of the front
window. Swing the sun visor to the side to cover the
side window. It can also be moved along the rod from
side-to-side in this position.
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch is
located with the power window switches on the
driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents the rear
passenger windows from operating, except from
the driver’s position. Press the switch to turn the lockout
feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to
show the lockout feature is on.
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and Pull-out
Extension
Your vehicle may have this feature. Pull the sun visor
down to block glare. Pull the sun visor extender out
for additional coverage. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount and swing it to the side to cover the
side window.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the
driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull the sun
visor down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on.
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To arm the theft-deterrent system:
1. Open the door.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter or the power door lock switch. The
security light will come on to inform the driver the
system is arming. If a door is open when the doors
are locked, the security light will flash.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system.
This is the security light.
If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the
theft-deterrent system will not start the arming
process until the last door is closed and the delay
page 2-11.
3. Close all doors. The security light should go off
after about 30 seconds. The alarm is not armed
until the security light goes off.
The content theft deterrent system does not
sense if the midgate or tailgate are open or ajar,
therefore, vehicle contents may not be protected if
the midgate is left open or ajar.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a locked door is opened without using the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The horn
will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not
placed in the ignition and turned to START or the door
is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm,
the alarm will go off. Your vehicle’s headlamps will flash
and the horn will sound for about two minutes, then
will turn off to save the battery power.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with the
power door lock switch while the door is open, or
with the RKE transmitter.
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait for
the security light to go out.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors
are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door
lock. It activates only if you use the power door
lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter.
You should also remember that you can start your
vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been
set off.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door. This
should set off the alarm.
While the alarm is set, the power door unlock switch will
not work.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the
headlamps flash, check to see if the horn works. The
horn fuse may be blown. To replace the fuse, see
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm if it is armed.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, the vehicle should be serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the
RKE transmitter or place the key in the ignition and
turn it to START to turn off the alarm. The alarm will not
stop if you try to unlock a door any other way.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
The system is automatically disarmed when the key is
turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or START
from the LOCK/OFF position.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
If the engine does not start and the security light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to
start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
PASS-Key III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses
does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs
service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be
faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made. In an
emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key. Up
to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The
following procedure is for programming additional keys
only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost or
do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
To program the new additional key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the original, already programmed, key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine will not
start, see your dealer/retailer for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the new key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON/RUN position within five seconds of turning
the ignition to the LOCK/OFF position in Step 3.
The security light will turn off once the key has been
programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
The ignition switch has
four different positions.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN
or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal
must be applied.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
capabilities of the vehicle and more information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also
locks the transmission on automatic transmission
vehicles. The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF.
C (ON/RUN): This position can be used to operate the
electrical accessories and to display some instrument
panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The
switch stays in this position when the engine is running.
The transmission is also unlocked in this position on
automatic transmission vehicles.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift
lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch
to LOCK/OFF.
If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or
ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could
be drained. You may not be able to start the vehicle
if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period
of time.
The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center.
If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to
left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If
this doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the
ignition could cause damage to the switch or break
the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the
way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key
cannot be turned by hand, see your dealer/retailer.
D (START): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch returns to ON/RUN for driving.
A warning tone will sound when the driver door is
opened, the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF and the key is in the ignition.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position lets things like the
radio and the windshield wipers operate while the
engine is off. Use this position if the vehicle must be
pushed or towed.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Starting Procedure
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go of
the key. The idle speed will slow down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine immediately after
starting it. Operate the engine and transmission
gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the engine is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• OnStar® System (if equipped)
The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START, cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also prevents cranking if the
engine is already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the ACC/
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.
• Sunroof (if equipped)
These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from
ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof
continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door
is opened. The radio continues to work for up to
10 minutes or until the driver door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The
engine will not start in any other position. To restart the
engine when the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try,
to let the cranking motor cool down.
Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the
vehicle is stopped.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for up to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool down. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, repeat
these steps. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine. Do not race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the engine and
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
On vehicles with this feature, you can change the
position of the throttle and brake pedals.
No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the
vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise
control.
The switch used to adjust
the pedals is located on
the instrument panel below
the climate control
system.
transmission gently until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed to work with the
electronics in the vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, the
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the
pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of
the switch to move the pedals away from your body.
Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to
confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving,
make only small adjustments.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle may have a memory function which lets
pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat,
{ CAUTION:
Engine Coolant Heater
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could
cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of
extension cord could overheat and cause a fire.
You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into
a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC
outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord rated for at least
15 amps.
The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (− 18°C). Vehicles
with an engine heater should be plugged in at least
four hours before starting. An internal thermostat in
the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0°F (−18°C).
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be
damaged.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
cord is located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment, near the power steering fluid
reservoir.
The length of time the heater should remain plugged in
depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in
the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the
best advice on this.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Active Fuel Management™
Automatic Transmission Operation
Vehicles with V8 engines may have Active Fuel
Management™. This system allows the engine to
operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending
on the driving conditions.
The vehicle has a Hydra-Matic® 6L80 automatic
transmission, and has an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument panel cluster. The
electronic shift position indicator displays when the shift
lever is moved out of P (Park).
When less power is required, such as cruising at a
constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the
half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better
fuel economy. When greater power demands are
required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing, or
merging onto a freeway, the system will maintain
full-cylinder operation.
There are several different positions for the shift lever.
If your vehicle has an Active Fuel Management™
indicator, see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC
on using this display.
See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
P (Park): This position locks your rear wheels. It is the
best position to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move easily.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) while the vehicle is
moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
is stopped.
When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle has
a heavy load, you may notice an increase in the
effort to shift out of P (Park). See Torque Lock
page 2-50 for more information.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice, or sand without damaging the transmission,
on page 4-32.
{ CAUTION:
N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the
vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also,
use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed.
It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift
lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D (Drive) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to a
lower gear selection if the transmission shifts too often.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your
foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear
while the engine is running at high speed.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road
conditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under
Loss of Control on page 4-11
When temperatures are very cold, the Hydra-Matic®
Automatic Transmission’s gear shifting may be delayed
providing more stable shifts until the engine warms
up. Shifts may be more noticeable with a cold
transmission. This difference in shifting is normal.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with
the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the engine is
not running at high speed when shifting the vehicle.
M (Manual Mode): This position lets drivers select the
range of gears appropriate for current driving
conditions. See Range Selection Mode later in this
section.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
D (Drive): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for the vehicle. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push the
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts
the transmission shifting to the current driving
conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and
downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to
determine, before making an upshift, if the engine
will be able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing
things such as throttle position, vehicle load, and
hill grade. If the shift stabilization feature determines
that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the
transmission does not upshift and instead holds the
current gear. In some cases, this may appear to be a
delayed shift, however the transmission is operating
normally.
Range Selection Mode
The vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shift controls.
Adaptive shift controls continually compares key
shift parameters to pre-programmed ideal shift
conditions stored in the transmissions computer. The
transmission constantly makes adjustments to improve
vehicle performance according to the way the vehicle
is being used, such as with a heavy load. During
this adaptive shift controls process, some shifts may
feel different as the transmission determines the
best settings for a particular shift.
On vehicles with a Range Selection Mode, this feature
may be used to control the vehicle’s transmission.
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to the M (Manual Mode).
2. Press the plus/minus button, to upshift or downshift
selecting the desired range of gears for current
driving conditions.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When in M (Manual Mode) a number displays next to
the M, indicating the current gear that has been
selected. The number displayed in the gear indicator is
the highest gear that can be used. However, the
vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it
adjusts to driving conditions. This means that all gears
below that number are available. When 5 (Fifth) is
selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are
Tow/Haul Mode
automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot
be used until the plus/minus button located on the
steering column lever is used to change to the gear.
Range Selection Mode controls the vehicle and engine
speed while driving down a hill or towing a trailer,
by allowing you to select a desired range of gears.
Grade Braking is not available when the Range
page 2-41 for more information.
The vehicle has a tow/haul mode. The tow/haul mode
adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift
cycling, providing increased performance, vehicle control,
and transmission cooling while towing or hauling heavy
loads.
While using the Range Selection Mode, Cruise Control
and the Tow/Haul mode can be used.
Press the button located on the end of the shift lever to
turn the tow/haul on or off. While the tow/haul is on, a light
on the instrument panel cluster comes on.
information.
page 4-47 for more information.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Grade Braking
Cruise Grade Braking
The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by
pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever.
While in Range Selection Mode, Grade Braking is
deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range
of gears.
Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a
downhill grade. It maintains vehicle speed by
automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses
the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle.
Cruise Grade Braking operates while Cruise Control is
engaged in Tow/Haul mode to assist in maintaining
vehicle speed under loaded vehicle conditions. It utilizes
vehicle acceleration and deviation from desired speed
to determine the correct gear for the operating condition.
If vehicle speed is above the desired speed the
transmission will downshift to slow the vehicle. If vehicle
speed is near or below desired speed the trans will
upshift, allowing vehicle speed to increase.
Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode
is selected and you are not in the Range Selection
Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode listed previously and
more information on the Range Selection Mode. Grade
Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds
when driving on downhill grades by automatically
implementing a shift schedule that utilizes the engine
and transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces wear
on the braking system and increases control of the
vehicle. Grade Braking monitors vehicle speed,
acceleration, engine torque and brake pedal usage.
Using this information, it detects when the truck is on a
downhill grade and the driver desires to slow the
vehicle by pressing the brake.
While in the Range Select Mode (RSM) mode, cruise
grade braking is not available.
information.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transfer Case
Four-Wheel Drive
If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send the
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. Read the following before using four-wheel
drive.
The transfer case knob is
located to the left of the
instrument panel cluster.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time.
While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight
turns, you may experience a vibration in the steering
system.
The vehicle has StabiliTrak®. Shifting into
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control
page 4-6.
Use this dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive.
You can choose among five driving settings:
Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting
will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. An
indicator light will flash while shifting. It will stay on
when the shift is completed. If for some reason
the transfer case cannot make a requested shift, it will
return to the last chosen setting.
Front Axle
The front axle engages and disengages automatically
when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for
the axle to engage or disengage is normal.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has StabiliTrak®. Shifting into
2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This setting is used for
driving in most street and highway situations. The
front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting
also provides the best fuel economy.
Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is
ideal for use when road surface traction conditions
are variable. When driving your vehicle in AUTO, the
front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is primarily
sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle’s software
determines a need for more traction, the system
will transfer more power to the front wheels. Driving in
this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than
Two-Wheel Drive High.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to N (Neutral) can cause
the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). You or someone else could be seriously
injured. Be sure to set the parking brake before
placing the transfer case in N (Neutral). See
4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use the four-wheel high
position when you need extra traction, such as on snowy
or icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting
also engages your front axle to help drive the vehicle.
This is the best setting to use when plowing snow.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
N (Neutral) only when towing the vehicle. See
If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on,
you should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
for service. See “SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message”
4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): This setting also engages
the front axle and delivers extra torque. You may never
need this setting. It sends maximum power to all four
wheels. You might choose Four-Wheel Drive Low if you
are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,
and while climbing or descending steep hills.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator
light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting
the transmission into gear.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive High or
AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel High or AUTO position.
This can be done at any speed, except when shifting from
Four-Wheel Drive Low. The indicator light will flash while
shifting. It will remain on when the shift is completed.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel Drive High
Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel High position. This can
be done at any speed, except when shifting from
Four-Wheel Drive Low.
The vehicle may have significant engagement noise
and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low
and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from N (Neutral)
while the engine is running.
See shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low later in this
section for more information.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive Low
position when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the
Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift unless the vehicle
is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission
is in N (Neutral). After 30 seconds the transfer case
will shift to Four-Wheel Drive High mode.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low
When Four-Wheel Low is engaged, vehicle speed
should be kept below 45 mph (72 km/h). Extended
high-speed operation in 4L may damage or shorten the
life of the drivetrain.
To shift to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position, the
ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with
the transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method
for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have
the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn
the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position.
2-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive High,
AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High switch position when
the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel
Drive High, AUTO or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator
light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete
the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 3 mph
(5 km/h) and the transmission is in N (Neutral).
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Drive Low
To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low to Four-Wheel Drive
High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High, the vehicle
must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h)
with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition
in ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting out
of Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving
1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive
High position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive
High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator
light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the
transmission into gear.
Shifting into Neutral
To shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following:
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
2. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
information.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
4. Put the transmission in N (Neutral).
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel Drive High.
The vehicle may have significant engagement noise
and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low
and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from N (Neutral)
while the engine is running.
6. Turn the transfer case dial clockwise to N (Neutral)
until it stops and hold it there until the N (Neutral)
light starts blinking. This will take at least
10 seconds. Then slowly release the dial to the
Four-Wheel Drive Low position. The N (Neutral) light
will come on when the transfer case shift to
N (Neutral) is complete.
2-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer case
is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to
R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the
transmission to D (Drive) for one second.
4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will
turn the engine off.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park).
10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the
vehicle.
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to
the desired position.
11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of
the different modes may cause the transfer case to enter
the shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer
case from possible damage and will only allow the
transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds.
The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to
three minutes.
Shifting Out of Neutral
To shift out of N Neutral do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off,
and shift the transmission to N (Neutral).
3. Turn the transfer case dial to the desired transfer
case shift position (Two-Wheel Drive High,
Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO).
After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral),
the N (Neutral) light will go out.
2-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
page 3-36.
Parking Brake
A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the
parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at
least 5 mph (8 km/h).
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever with
the parking brake symbol, located above the parking
brake pedal.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light goes off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
For vehicles with a release handle, set the parking
brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then
pushing down the parking brake pedal.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
2-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
page 3-36.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking
brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly
pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the parking
brake is not released when you begin to drive, the
brake system warning light will flash and a chime will
sound warning you that the parking brake is still on.
For vehicles without a release handle, set the parking
brake by holding the regular brake pedal down,
then pushing down the parking brake pedal.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see
2-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position by
pulling the shift lever toward you and moving it up
as far as it will go.
Shifting Into Park
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in N (Neutral).
{ CAUTION:
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
With four-wheel drive, if the transfer case is in
Neutral, the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the
shift lever is in P (Park). So, be sure the transfer
case is in a drive gear — not in Neutral. If you are
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave the vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park).
page 4-47.
1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set the parking
brake.
information.
2-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in P (Park) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move
the shift lever into P (Park), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from P (Park) without first pulling it toward you. If
you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked
into P (Park).
Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the
engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set.
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into P (Park) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of P (Park). This is called torque lock. To
prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into P (Park) properly before you leave the driver
page 2-50.
If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case
is in Neutral, the vehicle will be free to roll, even if
the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear — not in Neutral.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You
or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running unless you have to.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
P (Park) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission, then
you will be able to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
2-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you still are unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Ease the pressure on the shift lever.
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
2. While holding down the brake pedal, press the shift
lever all the way into P (Park).
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you are still having a problem shifting, then have the
vehicle serviced soon.
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park),
unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is
applied.
Parking Over Things That Burn
The shift lock release is always functional except
in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
{ CAUTION:
If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with
low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under the vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other things that
can burn.
To shift out of P (Park) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
2-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The vehicle’s exhaust system has been
modified, damaged or improperly repaired.
• There are holes or openings in the vehicle
body from damage or after-market
{ CAUTION:
Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and even death.
modifications that are not completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or if it is suspected
that exhaust is coming into the vehicle:
• Drive it only with the windows
completely down.
• Have the vehicle repaired immediately.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
• The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation
(parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that
may block underbody airflow or tail pipes).
• The exhaust smells or sounds strange or
different.
Never park the vehicle with the engine running in
an enclosed area such as a garage or a building
that has no fresh air ventilation.
• The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or
damage.
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
CAUTION: (Continued)
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be
sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are
on fairly level ground, always set the parking
brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
{ CAUTION:
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor
ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness and even death.
Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has
no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see
{ CAUTION:
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer case
in N (Neutral) will allow the vehicle to roll, even
if the automatic transmission shift lever is in
P (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in N (Neutral). Always set the
parking brake.
{ CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The
Follow the proper steps to be sure the vehicle will not
CAUTION: (Continued)
2-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on
or off.
Mirrors
The vehicle may also have a Rear Vision Camera
for more information.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it
for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
If the vehicle has RVC, the O (On/Off) button for
turning the automatic dimming feature on or off will not
be available.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
Automatic dimming reduces the glare from the
headlamps of the vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator light illuminates each
time the ignition is turned to start.
The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside
rearview mirror.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three additional control
buttons located at the bottom of the mirror. See
your dealer/retailer for more information about OnStar®
page 2-66 for more information about the services
OnStar® provides.
Cleaning the Mirror
Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. Use a
soft towel dampened with water.
2-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
Vehicles with outside
Vehicles with outside
power foldaway mirrors
have controls located
on the driver door armrest.
power mirrors have
controls located on the
driver door armrest.
To adjust each mirror:
1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger
side mirror.
Mirror Adjustment
1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control
pad to adjust the mirror.
2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
3. Adjust each outside mirror to see a little of the
vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.
4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To
fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror
outward, to return to its original position.
2-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
Park Tilt Mirrors
Reset the power foldaway mirrors if:
If the vehicle has the memory package, the passenger
and/or driver mirror tilts to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature lets
the driver view the curb when parallel parking. The
mirror(s) return to the original position when the vehicle
is shifted out of R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned
off or to OFF/LOCK.
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds.
Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information
Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
them one time using the mirror controls. This will reset
them to their normal position.
Outside Convex Mirror
Automatic Dimming
The driver outside mirror adjusts for the glare of the
headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming
{ CAUTION:
Turn Signal Indicator
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are. If
you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit
a vehicle on the right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.
The vehicle may also have a turn signal indicator on the
mirror. An arrow on the mirror flashes in the direction
of the turn or lane change.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Heated Mirrors
{ CAUTION:
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the
mirrors.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
• objects that are below the bumper,
underneath the vehicle, or if they are too
close or far from the vehicle
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic
information.
Object Detection Systems
• children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
If you do not use proper care before and while
backing; vehicle damage, injury, or death could
occur. Even with URPA, always check behind the
vehicle before backing up. While backing, be sure
to look for objects and check the vehicle’s mirrors.
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 5 mph
(8 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and
avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on
the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to
an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at
least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground.
2-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The display is located
To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below tailgate level.
Objects must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear
bumper. This distance may be less during warmer or
humid weather.
above the rear window and
can be seen by looking
over your right shoulder.
A single beep will sound the first time an object is
detected between 40 inches (1 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m)
away. Beeping will occur continuously when the vehicle
is at 23 inches (0.6 m) or closer to an object.
The following describes what will occur with the URPA
display as the vehicle gets closer to a detected object:
URPA uses three color-coded lights to provide distance
and system information.
Description
amber light
amber/amber lights
English
8 ft
40 in
Metric
2.5 m
1.0 m
How the System Works
amber/amber/red lights
and continuous beeping
for five seconds
amber/amber/red lights
flashing and continuous
beeping for five seconds
URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is
moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly
illuminates to indicate the system is working.
23 in
1 ft
0.6 m
0.3 m
URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light on the rear
display will flash.
2-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The system can be
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be
displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on the
rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into R
(Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions:
disabled by pressing the
rear park aid disable button
located next to the radio.
• The driver disables the system.
The indicator light will come on and PARK ASSIST OFF
displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC) to
indicate that URPA is off, see DIC Warnings and
the message.
• The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the
vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and
slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your
Notice: If you use URPA while the tailgate is
lowered, it may not detect an object behind your
vehicle, and you might back into the object and
damage your vehicle. Always verify the tailgate is
closed when using URPA or turn off URPA when
driving with the tailgate lowered.
• A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was hanging out of the tailgate during the
last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in the
rear display. Once the attached object is removed,
URPA will return to normal operation.
• A tow bar is attached to the vehicle.
• The vehicle’s bumper is damaged. Take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
• Other conditions may affect system performance,
such as vibrations from a jackhammer or the
compression of air brakes on a very large truck.
If the system is still disabled, after driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer.
2-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles Without Navigation System
Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
The rear vision camera system is designed to help
the driver when backing up by displaying a view of
the area behind the vehicle. When the key is in
the ON/RUN position and the driver shifts the vehicle
into R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears
on the inside rear view mirror. Once the driver shifts
out of R (Reverse), the video image automatically
disappears from the inside rear view mirror.
This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system.
Read this entire section before using it.
{ CAUTION:
The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not
replace driver vision. RVC does not:
• Detect objects that are outside the camera’s
field of view, below the bumper, or
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System
Off or On
underneath the vehicle.
To turn off the rear vision camera system, press and
• Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets.
hold z, located on the inside rearview mirror, until the
left indicator light turns off. The rear vision camera
display is now disabled.
Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the rear
vision camera screen, or use the screen during
longer, higher speed backing maneuvers or where
there could be cross-traffic. Your judged distances
using the screen will differ from actual distances.
To turn the rear vision camera system on again, press
and hold z until the left indicator light illuminates.
The rear vision camera system display is now enabled
and the display will appear in the mirror normally.
So if you do not use proper care before backing up,
you could hit a vehicle, child, pedestrian, bicyclist,
or pet, resulting in vehicle damage, injury, or death.
Even though the vehicle has the RVC system,
always check carefully before backing up by
checking behind and around the vehicle.
2-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles With Navigation System
The rear vision camera system is designed to help the
driver when backing up by displaying a view of the
area behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts
the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image
automatically appears on the navigation screen. Once
the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the navigation
screen will go back to the last screen that had been
displayed, after a delay.
Turning the Rear Vision Camera System
On or Off
To turn the rear vision camera system on or off:
1. Shift into P (Park).
4. Select the Video screen button. When the Video
screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on.
2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure
menu options, then press the MENU hard key
to select Display or touch the Display screen button.
The delay that is received after shifting out of
R (Reverse) is approximately 10 seconds. The delay
can be cancelled by performing one of the following:
3. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button. The
Rear Camera Options screen will display.
• Pressing a hard key on the navigation system.
• Shifting in to P (Park).
• Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
There is a message on the rear vision camera screen
that states “Check Surroundings for Safety”.
2-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The symbols appear when an object has been detected
by the URPA system. The symbol may cover the
object when viewing the navigation screen.
Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of
the Screen
To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen,
press the MENU button while the rear vision camera
image is on the display. Any adjustments made will only
affect the rear vision camera screen.
To turn the symbols on or off:
1. Make sure that URPA has not been disabled.
2. Shift into P (Park).
3. Press the MENU hard key to enter the configure
menu options, then press the MENU hard key
repeatedly until Display is selected or touch
the Display screen button.
] (Brightness): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus)
screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness
of the screen.
_ (Contrast): Touch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen
buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the
screen.
4. Select the Rear Camera Options screen button.
The Rear Camera Options screen will display.
5. Touch the Symbols screen button. The screen
button will be highlighted when on.
Symbols
The navigation system may have a feature that lets the
driver view symbols on the navigation screen while
using the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park
Assist (URPA) system must not be disabled to use
the caution symbols. If URPA has been disabled and
the symbols have been turned on, the Rear Parking
Assist Symbols Unavailable error message may display.
page 2-58.
Rear Vision Camera Error Messages
Service Rear Vision Camera System: This message
can display when the system is not receiving
information it requires from other vehicle systems.
If any other problem occurs or if a problem persists, see
your dealer/retailer.
2-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Vision Camera Location
The image is provided by the camera located under the
liftgate handle.
The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen differs from the actual
distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited.
The camera does not display objects which are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the bumper. The
area displayed on the screen can vary according to
vehicle orientation or road conditions.
The following illustration shows the field of view that the
camera provides.
2-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear vision camera system display in the rearview
mirror may turn off or not appear as expected due to one
of the following conditions. If this occurs the left
indicator light on the mirror will flash.
When the System Does Not Seem To
Work Properly
The rear vision camera system might not work properly
or display a clear image if:
• A slow flash may indicate a loss of video signal, or
no video signal present during the reverse cycle.
• The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear
Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section.
• A fast flash may indicate that the display has been
on for the maximum allowable time during a
reverse cycle, or the display has reached an Over
Temperature limit.
• It is dark.
• The sun or the beam of headlights is shining
directly into the camera lens.
The fast flash conditions are used to protect the
video device from high temperature conditions. Once
conditions return to normal the device will reset
and the green indicator will stop flashing.
• Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the
camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water,
and wipe it with a soft cloth.
• The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the
position and mounting angle of the camera
can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure
to have the camera and its position and mounting
angle checked at your dealer/retailer.
During any of these fault conditions, the display will be
blank and the indicator will continue to flash as long
as the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or until the conditions
return to normal.
Pressing and holding z when the left indicator light is
flashing will turn off the video display along with the
left indicator light.
• There are extreme temperature changes.
2-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar service is provided subject to the OnStar Terms
and Conditions included in the OnStar Subscriber
glove box literature.
Some services such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance may not be available until
the owner of the vehicle registers with OnStar. After the
first prepaid year, contact OnStar to select a monthly or
annual subscription payment plan. If a payment plan is
not selected, the OnStar system and all services,
including airbag notification and emergency services,
may be deactivated and no longer available. For more
information visit onstar.com (U.S.) or onstar.ca (Canada),
or press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If the airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic
call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request
emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys
are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar
Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for
60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar
Not all OnStar services are available on all vehicles. To
check if this vehicle is able to provide the services
described below, or for a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations, see the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the glove box or visit onstar.com (U.S.) or
onstar.ca (Canada), contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, or press
the OnStar button to speak with an OnStar advisor
24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is
available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to
have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside Service.
2-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Services Available with the
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated into
the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Most vehicles include 30 trial minutes
good for 60 days. Hands-Free Calling can also be
linked to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or
a Bell Mobility service plan in Canada, depending
on eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar
advisor by pressing the OnStar button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
Vehicles with the OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation
system can provide voice-guided driving directions.
Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor
locate a business or address and download driving
directions to the vehicle. Voice-guided directions to the
desired destination will play through the audio system
speakers. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
OnStar Services Included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or
Driving Directions - Advisor delivered
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Virtual Advisor
How OnStar Service Works
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. Press the phone button and give a few
simple voice commands to browse through the various
topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information. This feature is only available in the
continental U.S.
The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle
information. This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar Call Center when the OnStar button is
pressed, the emergency button is pressed, or if the
airbags or AACN system deploy. This information
usually includes the vehicle’s GPS location and, in the
event of a crash, additional information regarding
the crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the
direction from which the vehicle was hit). When
the Virtual Advisor feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling
is used, the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle’s
GPS location so they can provide services where it is
located.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be
used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless the vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar
service also cannot work unless the vehicle is in a place
where the wireless service provider OnStar has hired
for that area has coverage, network capacity and
reception when the service is needed, and technology
that is compatible with the OnStar service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas, or at all times.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial
numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information.
Location information about the vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
2-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle must have a working electrical system,
including adequate battery power, for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle
in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or
wireless phone network congestion.
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor
cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is
red, the system may not be functioning properly.
Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is
appearing), your OnStar subscription has expired and
all services have been deactivated. Press the OnStar
button to confirm that the OnStar equipment is active.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use this system with any garage door opener
that does not have the stop and reverse feature.
This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the transmitter. Because of the steps involved,
it may be helpful to have another person assist with
programming the transmitter.
Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for
use in other vehicles, as well as, for future programming.
Only the original remote control transmitter is needed for
Fixed Code programming. The programmed buttons
should be erased when the vehicle is sold or the lease
ends. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons”
later in this section.
This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote
System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
Park the vehicle outside of the garage when
programming a garage door. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or gate that is
being programmed.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
2-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
To program up to three devices:
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head
unit and may be a colored button. Press this
button. After pressing this button, complete the
following steps in less than 30 seconds.
3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold
the Universal Home Remote button that will be
used to control the garage door until the garage
door moves. The indicator light, above the selected
button, should slowly blink. This button may
need to be held for up to 20 seconds.
1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside
buttons at the same time for one to two seconds,
and immediately release them.
2-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the button
when the garage door moves. The indicator light
will blink rapidly until programming is complete.
To program up to three devices:
5. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
To program another Rolling Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5,
choosing a different function button in Step 3 than
what was used for the garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, the garage door
opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code
garage door opener.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
1. To verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed
Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand
held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the
garage door opener motor. If there are a row of
dip switches similar to the graphic above, the
garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do
not see a row of dip switches, return to the
previous section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
For questions or help programming the Universal Home
Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to
learcar2u.com.
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are Fixed
Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and
the procedure will have to be repeated.
Your hand held transmitter can have between eight
to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of
transmitter.
2-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit)
could also have a row of dip switches that can
be used when programming the Universal Home
Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor
head and hand held transmitter are different, or if
the dip switch settings are different, use the
dip switch settings on the motor head unit to
program the Universal Home Remote. The motor
head dip switch settings can also be used when the
original hand held transmitter is not available.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
The panel of switches might not appear exactly as
they do in the examples above, but they should
be similar.
The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter
could be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position could be labeled as
“Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position could be labeled
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position could be labeled
as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
2-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left
to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position, write
“Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings written down in Step 2 now
become the button strokes to be entered into the
Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to
enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in
order from left to right, into the Universal Home
Remote, when completing Step 4.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all
three buttons at the same time for about
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two and
one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home Remote
for each switch setting as follows:
three seconds. Release the buttons to put the
Universal Home Remote into programming mode.
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in the
vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle button in
the vehicle.
2-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions, again,
firmly press and release all three buttons at the
same time. The indicator lights will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
Any of the three buttons can be reprogrammed by
repeating the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button that will be used to
control the garage door until the garage door
moves. The indicator light above the selected button
should slowly blink. This button may need to be
held for up to 55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
7. Immediately release the button when the garage
door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly
until programming is complete.
The programmed buttons should be erased when the
vehicle is sold or the lease ends.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on the
Universal Home Remote device:
8. Press and release the same button again. The
garage door should move, confirming that
programming is successful and complete.
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the same
time for approximately 20 seconds, until the
indicator lights, located directly above the buttons,
begin to blink rapidly.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8, choosing
a different button in Step 6 than what was used for
the garage door opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink, release both
buttons. The codes from all buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least half of
a second. The indicator light will come on while the
signal is being transmitted.
2-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Overhead Console
Storage Areas
For vehicles with an overhead console, it contains
reading lights and a small storage area.
Glove Box
Press the button next to each light to turn it on and off.
Lift up on the glove box lever to open it.
Front Armrest Storage Area
Cupholders
Vehicles with a center armrest storage compartment,
located in the front bench seat, fold down the armrest
and press the handle at the front of the armrest to open
it. Let the cover pop up and swing open.
For vehicles with cupholders for front and rear
passengers, the cupholders are located in the center
console and on the back of the center console.
Press down on the access door and release to open
and use the front cupholders. Pull down on the
door located on the back of the console to use the rear
cupholders. Push the door back down to close it.
Push down and then back on the front cupholder to
remove it for cleaning.
Center Console Storage
For vehicles with a console compartment, cupholders
are located between the bucket seats.
Press the button and lift the console cover to open.
For vehicles with a rear armrest/cuholder, it can be
used by the reat seat passengers. Pull up and then out
on the tab, located at the top center of the armrest.
Then pull the armrest down to access the cupholder.
The back of the console has a cupholder that folds down
for the rear seat passenger to use.
2-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Tie the load and secure it to the crossrails or the
siderail supports. Use the crossrails only to keep
the load from sliding. To move a crossrail, lift
the release lever up, on both sides of the rail. Then
slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing
the force side to side. Press the release lever
down on both sides of the rail, down to tighten it.
Try to slide the crossrail back and forth slightly
to make sure it is tight.
Luggage Carrier
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle can damage
the vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side
rails, making sure to fasten it securely.
For vehicles with a luggage carrier, items can be loaded
on top of the vehicle.
• To carry long items, move the crossrails as far
apart as possible. Tie the load to the crossrails and
the siderails or siderail supports. Also tie the
load to the bumpers, but do not tie the load so
tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the roof. It
can also have crossrails which can be moved back
and forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the
siderails or siderail supports.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely
locked into the siderail.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle
page 4-34.
A Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) is located
above the rear window glass.
Make sure the cargo is properly loaded.
Make sure items loaded on the roof of the vehicle do
not block or damage the CHMSL.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo while driving,
periodically stop and check to make sure cargo is still
securely fastened.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a
piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails
and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood
to the siderail supports.
2-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove a cargo panel(s):
Cargo Cover Panels
For vehicles with a three-piece cargo cover system, the
cargo panels can be removed and stored in the cargo
area of the vehicle.
more information on the tailgate.
{ CAUTION:
Improperly stored cargo cover panels could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. Someone could be injured. If a
panel is removed, always store it in the proper
storage location. When putting it back, always
make sure that it is securely reattached.
Notice: Exceeding the weight limit of 250 lbs
(113 kg) can damage the cargo covers, and the
repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not put anything on top of the cargo
covers over the weight limit.
The panels are embossed on the upper center
portion with the numbers 1, 2 and 3. There are also
numbered labels on the bottom of the panels.
The numbers on the top and bottom of the panels
will be used as reference when removing, storing
and reinstalling the panels.
2-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove cargo panel 2 in the same way and set it
aside. Remove as many cargo panels as needed.
4. To remove cargo panel 1, unlock the two rear
latches, lift the cover slightly and pull rearward.
After each cargo panel has been removed, store them
within the cargo storage area using the cargo panel
storage system.
2. Unlock the cargo panel 3 by pulling forward on the
driver side and passenger side cargo panel latches,
located on the bottom of each cargo panel.
2-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the panels:
Cargo Panel Storage System
1. Secure the storage
strap system in the
cargo storage area by
attaching the six
The three cargo panels can be stored in the cargo area
using the storage strap system. Always use the
storage strap system to store the cargo panels while
driving.
clips included on the
cargo strap system
to the tie down
locations on either side
of the storage area.
Before storing the cargo panels, make sure that the
latches on the cargo panels are in the locked
position. The latches are locked when they are
parallel to the front and back edge of the panel.
2-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use the following instructions for the proper storage
sequence and location for each panel:
2. Starting with cargo panel 1, load the cargo panel
with the latches facing up toward the side of the
cargo box.
A. Secure clip A on the storage strap.
B. Secure clip B on the storage strap.
Do the same for cargo panel 2 then panel 3.
Make sure to store panel 2 with the latches facing
down and panel 3 with latches facing up toward the
side of the cargo box.
C. Place the remaining primary straps on top of the
lid and tray at the top of the cargo area.
2-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Tighten all straps by pulling on the free end of each
strap.
3. Place the primary straps over the three cargo
covers (A). Fasten the four strap clips (B).
2-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Close both cross locks at the center of the strap
system to tightly secure.
Panels 3, 2, 1 Loaded
2-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reinstalling the Cargo Cover Panels
The strap system can remain attached to the side of the
cargo area while it is not in use, or it can be stored
inside the top box storage compartment. See Top-Box
To reinstall a cargo panel:
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar
Place the cover on the cargo box within 4 inches of
the Midgate® and lower the rear of the panel
within 2 to 3 inches from the top of the cargo box.
Push the cover forward making sure that the
guide block engages the retainer bracket opening.
Continue to push forward until the panel is fully
seated against the Midgate. Then lower the rear of
the cover to engage the striker pegs (A) to align
with the striker assembly (B).
1. Starting with cargo panel 1, place the latches in the
unlocked position. Place cargo panel 1 on the cargo
area rails while holding the back of the cargo
panel up.
2-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. The driver side cargo cover panel latch must lock in
place before the passenger side latch can be locked.
If this procedure is not followed exactly, the cargo
cover panels might not correctly lock in place. Push
the driver side latch toward the front of the vehicle to
lock the cover in position. A click sounds when each
latch locks. Lock the remaining passenger side latch
on panel 1.
Push the panel forward until it is snug against the
other panel and then let the back of the panel down
making sure that the pegs (A) align with the
receivers (B).
4. Push the latches toward the front of the vehicle,
starting with the driver side latch, to lock the
panel in place. A click sounds when each latch
locks correctly.
3. Install cargo cover 2 followed by 3 next. Place the
latches in the unlocked position. Place the cargo
cover panel on the cargo area rails while holding the
back of the cargo panel up.
2-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding and Storage of Straps
Fold the straps for storing inside the top box storage
compartment:
2. Fold the four primary strap ends toward the center
as shown.
1. Extend the six strap ends on a flat surface.
3. Take the short strap and wrap it around the folded
webbing, forming a package.
2-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Tie Downs
The vehicle has cargo tie downs, located in the rear
cargo area. These can be used to secure cargo.
The tie downs can also be used to secure the cargo
cover panel strap system, if the vehicle has one.
For more information see “Cargo Cover Panels” earlier
in this section.
All-Weather Cargo Area
The vehicle’s cargo area can be used in many different
configurations--cargo panels on or off, Midgate® up
or down, rear glass in or out. It has features that resist
the elements and protect cargo. It is designed to
quickly direct water out of the cargo box. The top drain
grates, side rail channels, catch cups, Midgate®
drain, cargo area floor drains and the rubber cargo mat
help do this.
4. Take the storage strap and wrap it around the
package. Finally, attach the hooks to the webbing
and place the straps inside the top box storage
compartment.
2-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Even when all of these things are working properly and
the cover system is on, there may be some instances
(heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.) when
water can collect the following areas:
F. Rear drains
G. Cargo floor
H. Cargo mat
Maintenance and Cleaning
To ensure that the water management system performs
properly, be sure that the Midgate®, tailgate and cover
system are fully closed and that all parts are clean and
not blocked with debris. Follow the instructions given
next in this section for the proper procedures on cleaning
each item.
A. Top drain grates
B. Removable front drain grate (Midgate® drain gate)
C. Side rail channels and catch cups
D. Front drains
E. Water drainage area around both sides of the box
and the tailgate side
2-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove each drain grate, do the following:
Top Drain Grates – Removal and
Cleaning
on page 2-78 for more information.
The top drain grates are located near the rear window
on both sides of the vehicle. Clean the grates and drains
if there is a blockage.
2. Grasp the edges of the grate and pull it out from
the vehicle. Flush the drain with clean water.
2-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace the drain grate:
Side Rail Channels
1. Line up the clips on the vehicle with the slots in the
grate and firmly push the grate down.
The side rail channels are located on top of both sides
of the cargo area. Flush them out with clean water if
debris collects inside of them.
Do not force the grate. If it does not clip into place,
realign the clips with the holes and try again.
Carefully load cargo into the cargo area, so that the
rails do not get damaged.
2-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Midgate® Drain Grate Removal and
Cleaning
After hauling dirt, wood chips, pebbles etc. the Midgate
drain should be flushed with water. First remove the
drain grate:
for more information.
The removable Midgate drain grate is located near the
base of the Midgate.
2. Pull up on the rear side of the drain grate, tilt it
toward the front of the vehicle, and pull it out.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate.
2-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Area Floor Drains
Top-Box Storage
The cargo net has cut outs for the four cargo-area floor
drains located under the cargo mat near the sides of
the cargo area.
The vehicle has top-box storage units on both sides of
the vehicle. The passenger side top box contains
the tools needed to change a flat tire.
Periodically flush the drains through the cut outs to clear
debris and allow water to drain from the cargo area. If
the cargo area is extremely dirty lift up the edges of the
cargo floor mat or take the whole mat out and flush
the drains with water.
Use the key to unlock or lock it. Press the key cylinder
button and swing the lid open. Turn on the cargo
lamps, if the vehicle has them, to light the inside of the
for more information.
2-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual-Open/Manual-Close: To open the sunroof
press and hold the rear of the driver’s side switch until
the sunroof reaches the desired position. To close
the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver’s side
switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position.
The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof,
but can also be opened manually.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close the sunroof, the ignition needs
to be turned to ON/RUN, or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) must be active. When RAP is active, the
sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is
turned off, or until a front door is opened. See Retained
information.
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From
the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s
side switch a second time to open the sunroof to
the full-open position.
There are two switches in
the overhead console that
operate the sunroof.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
2-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the
sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the
driver’s side switch. The sunroof will open automatically.
To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a
second time. To express-close the sunroof, fully press
and release the front of the driver’s side switch. The
sunroof will close automatically. To stop the sunroof
partway, press the switch a second time. The sunshade
will open automatically with the sunroof, but can also
be opened manually.
Anti-Pinch Feature: If an object is in the path of the
sunroof while it is closing, the anti-pinch feature will
detect the object and stop the sunroof from closing at
the point of the obstruction. The sunroof will then
open halfway, and the air deflector will raise. To close
the sunroof once it has re-opened, refer to the
“Express-Close” or “Manual-Close” functions described
previously. If the sunroof is in the vent position, and
there is an object in the path of the sunroof when
it closing, the anti-pinch feature will detect the object
and stop the sunroof. To close the sunroof once it has
re-opened, refer to the “Manual-Close” or
The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the
sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From
the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s
side switch a second time to open the sunroof to
the full-open position.
“Express-Close” functions described previously.
Do not keep the sunroof open for long periods of time
while the vehicle is not in use. Debris can collect in
the tracks, damage the sunroof operation and plug the
water draining system.
When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will
automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when
the sunroof is closed.
Vent: The sunroof has an express-vent open feature.
From the closed position, press the rear of the
passenger’s side switch to vent the sunroof. To stop the
sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. To
close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the
passenger’s side switch. To stop the sunroof partway,
release the switch.
2-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-23
(If Equipped).
on page 2-37.
Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette
Button (If Equipped). See Adjustable Throttle and
Windshield Washer Fluid Button (If Equipped).
on page 3-16 (If Equipped).
K. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped). See
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
The tilt steering wheel lets the steering wheel be
adjusted.
| (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button
located on top of the steering column, to make the front
and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This
warns others that you are having trouble. Press again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle’s
turn signals will not work.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering
wheel.
The tilt lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Raise or lower the steering wheel to a comfortable
level, then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash
to signal a lane change. The turn signals automatically
flash three times. It will flash six times if the tow-haul
mode is active. Holding the turn signal lever for
more than one second causes the turn signals to flash
until the lever is released.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
G : Turn and Lane Change Signals
5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
N : Windshield Wipers
The lever returns to its starting position when it is
released.
If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows
flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb may be
burned out.
L : Windshield Washer
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out,
check the fuse. See Instrument Panel Fuse Block
page 5-112.
Flash-to-Pass.
Exterior Lamps.
Information for these features is on the pages following.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal On Chime
Flash-to-Pass
If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. See DIC Warnings and
message off, move the turn signal lever to the off
position.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on. They
will stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel cluster
will come on. Release the lever to return to normal
operation.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
5 3 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To
change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the
lever toward the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward
you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Wipers
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
8 (Mist): Turn to mist for a single wiping cycle. Hold it
there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers
stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer, for
more wipe cycles.
For vehicles with Rainsense™ II windshield wipers, the
moisture sensor is located next to the inside rearview
mirror and is mounted on the windshield. When active,
these sensors are able to detect moisture on the
windshield and automatically turn on the wipers.
9 (Off): Turns the wipers off.
To turn on the Rainsense feature, the wipers must be
set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
lever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity
of the sensor.
6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time. The
delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as
the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can be
very useful in light rain or snow.
Since different drivers have different setting
preferences, it is recommended that the mid-range
setting (position 3) be used initially. For more wipes,
select the higher settings; for fewer wipes, select
the lower settings located closer to the off position
on the multifunction lever.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed.
? (High Speed): For high-speed wiping.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently
loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may not
clear the windshield well, making it harder to see
and drive safely. If the blades do become damaged,
install new blades or blade inserts. For more information,
The sensor will automatically control the frequency of
the wipes from the off setting to the high speed
setting according to the weather conditions. The wipers
can be left in a rainsense mode even when it is not
raining.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When Rainsense is active, the headlamps will turn on
automatically if the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO
position and the wipers are active.
Heated Windshield Washer
For vehicles with the heated windshield washer fluid
system it can be used to help clear ice, snow, tree sap,
or bugs from the windshield.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
_ (Heated Washer Fluid): Press the heated washer
fluid button to activate the heated windshield washer
fluid system. This activation initiates four heated
wash/wipe cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle may
take up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on outside
temperature. After the first wash/wipe cycle, it may take
up to 20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles to
begin. Press the button again to turn off the heated
windshield washer fluid system or it will automatically
turn off after four wipe cycles have been completed.
Windshield Washer
{ CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your
vision.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system
is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam may flow out of the washer nozzles
for a short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed.
This is a normal condition.
L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The
wipers clear the window and then either stop or return
to the preset speed.
HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES PENDING is
displayed on the DIC when the washer system is heating
the fluid. WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is
displayed when the washer fluid is low. See DIC
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control buttons
are located on left side of
the steering wheel.
Cruise Control
{ CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not
use the cruise control on winding roads or in
heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction
can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could
lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery
roads.
T (On/Off): Turns the system on and off. The
indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns
off when cruise control is off.
With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h)
or more can be maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work
at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): This makes the vehicle
accelerate or resume to a previously set speed.
SET − (Set/Coast): Sets the speed or makes the
vehicle decelerate.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control turns off.
If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system and begins
to limit wheel spin while you are using cruise control, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
allow the cruise control to be safely used again, it
can be turned back on.
[ (Cancel): Cancels the cruise control without erasing
the set speed from memory.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or
if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brake is applied, the cruise control shuts off.
But it does not need to be reset.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster
will come on after the cruise control has been set to
the desired speed.
Once the vehicle is going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, press the +RES button on the steering wheel. The
vehicle goes back to the previously set speed and
stays there.
{ CAUTION:
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If you leave your cruise control on when you are
not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
into cruise when you do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise
control switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the +RES button on the steering
wheel until the desired speed is reached, then
release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button. Each time this is done,
the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
1. Press T .
2. Get up to the desired speed.
3. Press the SET− button located on the steering
wheel and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work on hills depends
upon the vehicles speed, load, and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s
speed. When going downhill, you may have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speed
down. When the brakes are applied the cruise control
shuts off.
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the steering
wheel until the desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
• To slow down in small amounts, press the
SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each
time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) slower.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
• Press [ on the steering wheel.
• Press T on the steering wheel.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will
slow down to the previous set cruise speed.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the
headlamps at normal brightness, together with the
following:
• Parking Lamps
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps control
is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
When the vehicle is turned off and the headlamps are in
AUTO, the headlamps may automatically remain on
for a set time. The time of the delay can be changed
page 3-46.
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Taillamps
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps
together with the following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
• License Plate Lamps
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the headlamps together
9 (Off): Turns off the automatic headlamps and
daytime running lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp
control to the off position again to turn the automatic
headlamps or DRL back on.
with the following:
• Parking Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Taillamps
For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will
only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
• License Plate Lamps
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is
on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes
after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are
turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will
stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to
prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the
headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp
on position to make the headlamps stay on for an
additional 10 minutes.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required
on all vehicles first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
Push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to change the headlamps from low
beam to high beam.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The transmission is not in P (Park).
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
Headlamps on Reminder
When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel lights,
and other lamps will not be on.
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when the
headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on
and the key is out of the ignition. To turn off the chime,
turn the headlamp switch to off or AUTO and then
back on, or close and re-open the door. In the AUTO
mode, the headlamps turn off once the ignition is
in LOCK/OFF or may remain on until the headlamp
delay ends (if enabled in the DIC). See “Exit Lighting”
page 3-67.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
To turn off the DRL lamps, turn the exterior lamps
control to the OFF position and then release. For
vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be
in the P (Park) position, before the DRL lamps can
be turned off.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure the instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See Instrument Panel
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch
is in AUTO, the automatic headlamp system will turn on
the headlamps at the normal brightness along with other
lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps,
roof marker lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The
radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the
transmission must be in the P (Park) position, before
the automatic headlamp system can be turned off.
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for
better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking
lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for
your fog lamps to work.
The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel. Do not cover this sensor or the
system will come on whenever the ignition is on.
The fog lamp button is located on the left side of your
instrument panel.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather, or a tunnel. This is normal.
# (Fog Lamps): Press the button to turn the fog lamps
on. An indicator light will glow near the button when
the fog lamps are on. Press the button again to
turn them off.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
Instrument Panel Brightness
The knob for this feature is located next to the exterior
lamps control.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you
restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog
lamp button again.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Push the knob to
extend and then turn clockwise or counterclockwise to
brighten or dim the instrument panel lights and the radio
display. This only works if the headlamps or parking
lamps are on.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
To turn on the dome lamps, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the knob all the way clockwise.
Exterior Cargo Lamps
The cargo lamp can be used if more light is needed in
the cargo area of the vehicle or in the top-box
storage units. Some vehicles will only have a cargo
lamp in the driver side top box.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps come on when any door is opened.
They turn off after all the doors are closed.
The cargo lamps come on by turning on the interior
dome lamps.
The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness knob, located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column,
clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the
dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened
or closed.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamp Override
Electric Power Management
The dome lamp override button is located next to the
exterior lamps control.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management (EPM)
that estimates the battery’s temperature and state
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for best
performance and extended life of the battery.
k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome
lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the
button again to return it to the extended position so that
the dome lamps come on when a door is opened.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the voltage is
raised slightly to quickly bring the charge back up.
When the state of charge is high, the voltage is lowered
slightly to prevent overcharging. If the vehicle has a
voltmeter gage or a voltage display on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), you may see the voltage move
up or down. This is normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
Entry/Exit Lighting
The vehicle has an illuminated entry/exit feature.
The dome lamps come on if the dome override button is
in the out position, when a door is opened or the key
is removed from the ignition.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical
loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is
because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning
fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is
needed for very high electrical loads.
Reading Lamps
If the vehicle has reading lamps, press the button
located next to the lamp to turn it on or off.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog
lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at
high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer
loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets.
The vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. The lamps cannot be adjusted.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output
and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase
engine idle speed to generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of
some accessories.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located on the instrument panel and one inside
the center floor console.
Your vehicle may also have an outlet on the rear of the
center floor console above the cupholder door.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels, without
being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of
corrective action, this action may be noticeable to the
driver. If so, a Driver Information Center (DIC) message
might be displayed, such as BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE,
BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY. If this
message is displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible. See DIC
To use an outlet, remove the protective cap. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap. The
accessory power outlet is operational at all times.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the
vehicle can damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use
equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of
20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamps if they are left on
for more than 10 minutes when the ignition is in
LOCK/OFF. This helps to prevent the battery from
running down.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlets and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory power plugs.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by the warranty. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug because the power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
Climate Controls
If your vehicle has this feature it is located in the center
console or on the instrument panel. Pull up on the
ashtray door to open it if it is in the console or pull the
door open it if it is on the instrument panel.
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation of
the vehicle can be controlled with this system.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items
are put in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite them and possibly
damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items
in the ashtray.
To remove the ashtray, pull it out from the console or
from the slide out door. To reinstall the ashtray,
slide it back to the original position.
To use the cigarette lighter, if the vehicle has one, push
it in all the way, and let go. When it is ready for use,
it will pop back out by itself.
Do not use the lighter to plug in accessory devices. Use
the power outlets provided.
A. Fan Control
B. Outside Air
C. Recirculation
D. Air Delivery Mode
Control
F. Driver and
Passenger
Temperature
Controls
G. Rear Window
Defogger
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating does not let the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating can occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
E. Air Conditioning
Temperature Control: Move the thumbwheels up or
down to increase or decrease the temperature on
the driver side or the passenger side of the vehicle.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the
knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front
system off.
0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog
or frost from the windshield more quickly. Air is
directed to the windshield and side window vents, with
some directed to the floor vents. In this mode, the
system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor runs
automatically in this setting, unless the outside
temperature is close to freezing.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow
inside the vehicle. The knob can be positioned between
two modes, for a combination of those modes.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards the
windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed
to the upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the
air conditioning system on or off. An indicator light
comes on to show that the air conditioning is on. The air
conditioning can be selected in any mode as long as
the fan control is on.
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some
of the air directed to the windshield, side window, and
second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air. Recirculation cannot
be selected when in Floor Mode.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the
system to operate more efficiently.
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the
windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. In this
mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is
normal.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
: (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light comes on to show that outside
air is on. Air from outside the vehicle is circulated
throughout the vehicle. The outside air mode can be
used with all modes, but it cannot be used with
the recirculation mode. Pressing this button again will
cancel the recirculation mode.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button on
the right knob to turn the rear window defogger on or off.
The system automatically turns off several minutes
after it has been activated. The defogger can also be
turned off by turning off the engine. Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that
recirculation is on.
For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors, the
mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the
surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button
is pressed.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air
inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defrost, or defogging modes. If recirculation is selected
while in one of those modes, the indicator flashes
three times and turns off. The air conditioning
compressor will also come on when this mode is
activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may
fog when the weather is cold and damp. To clear the
fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increase
the fan speed. The recirculation mode can also be
turned off by turning off the engine.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not attach
a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or
anything similar to the defogger grid.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on
or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is
directed to the floor. This direction can be changed by
pressing the mode button. Recirculation can be selected
once you have selected vent or bi-level mode. The
temperature can also be adjusted using either
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can
be controlled with this system. The vehicle also has
a flow-through ventilation system described later in this
section.
temperature button. If the air delivery mode or
temperature settings are adjusted with the system off,
the display illuminates briefly to show the settings
and then returns to off. The system can be turned back
on by pressing either O , D , C , # , the defrost or
the AUTO button.
Driver’s Side Temperature Control
The driver side temperature buttons are used to adjust
the temperature of the air coming through the system
on the drivers side. The temperature can be adjusted
even if the system is turned off. This is possible
since outside air will always flow through the system as
the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to
recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in this
section.
A. Driver and
Passenger
Temperature
Controls
B. Fan Control
C. AUTO
D. Defrost
E. Recirculation
F. Outside Air
G. Air Delivery Mode
Control
H. Display
I. Power Button
J. Rear Window
Defogger
K. Air Conditioning
L. PASS
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The driver side temperature display
will show the temperature setting decreasing or
increasing.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver and Passenger Side Temperature
Controls
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
The driver and passenger side temperature buttons are
used to adjust the temperature of the air coming
through the system on the driver or passenger’s side of
the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even if
the system is turned off. This is possible since outside
air always flows through the system as the vehicle
is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current temperature(s) and AUTO will
be lit on the display. The current delivery mode and
fan speed will also be displayed for approximately
5 seconds.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the
cabin temperature. The driver side or passenger
side temperature display shows the temperature setting
decreasing or increasing.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over about
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down the vehicle. The light on the
button comes on in recirculation.
The passenger side temperature setting can be set to
match the driver side temperature setting by pressing
the PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator.
When the passenger side temperature setting is
set different than the driver side setting, the indicator on
the PASS button illuminates and both the driver side
and passenger side temperature displays are shown.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Set the driver and passenger temperature.
Manual Operation
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Use the driver or
passenger temperature buttons to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If a temperature
setting of 60°F (15°C) is chosen, the system
remains at the maximum cooling setting. If a
temperature setting of 90°F (32°C) is chosen, the
system remains at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the
vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
D C (Fan Control): Press these buttons to increase or
decrease the fan speed.
Pressing either fan button while in automatic control
places the fan under manual control. The fan setting
remains displayed and the AUTO light turns off. The air
delivery mode remains under automatic control.
H G (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press these buttons
to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
Repeatedly press either button until the desired mode
appears on the display. Pressing either mode button
while the system is off changes the air delivery mode
without turning the system on. Pressing either mode
button while in automatic control places the mode under
manual control.
Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load and also
turns on the headlamps. For more information on
the solar sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system will
delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
The air delivery mode setting will be displayed and the
AUTO light turns off. The fan remains under automatic
control.
H (Vent): Air is directed to the instrument panel
outlets.
) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument
panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards the
windshield and side window outlets.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this button is pressed when the air conditioning
compressor is unavailable, the indicator flashes three
times and then turns off. If the air conditioning is on and
the outside temperature drops below a temperature
which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective, the air
conditioning light turns off to show that the air
6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with
some to the windshield, side window outlets, and second
row floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically
selects outside air.
- (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or
moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets,
and side window vents. In this mode, the system
turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is close to
freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected
while in the defrost mode.
conditioning mode has been canceled.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it takes
for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to
operate more efficiently.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so a small amount of water might drip under the
vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine. This is
normal.
0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window vents, with some directed
to the floor vents. In this mode, the system automatically
forces outside air into the vehicle and runs the air
conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature
is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defrost mode.
@ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation
mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that the
recirculation is on.
This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air
inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent
outside air and odors from entering the vehicle.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning
(A/C) compressor on and off. An indicator light comes on
to show that the air conditioning is on.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor, defog,
or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with one of
those modes, the indicator light flashes three times and
then turns off. The air conditioning compressor also
comes on when this mode is activated. While in
recirculation mode the windows may fog when the
weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog, select either
the defog or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear
window defogger on or off. It automatically turns off
several minutes after it has been activated. The
defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are
clear.
The recirculation mode can be turned off by pressing the
outside air button, or by turning off the ignition.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
; (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode
on. An indicator light on the button comes on to
show that outside is on. Air from outside the vehicle is
circulated throughout the vehicle. The outside air
mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot be used
with the recirculation mode.
Heated Mirrors: For vehicles with heated outside
rearview mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or
frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window
defog button is pressed. See Outside Power Mirrors
on page 2-56.
Pressing this button again will cancel the
recirculation mode.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is also an interior
temperature sensor
Sensors
located next to the steering
wheel that measures the
temperature of the air
inside your vehicle.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor located
behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air
temperature and helps maintain the temperature
inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle
could cause a false reading in the displayed
temperature.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille, middle of
the instrument panel, monitors the solar heat. Do not
cover the solar sensor or the system will not work
properly.
The climate control system uses the information from
these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by
adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air
delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler
air to the side of the vehicle facing the sun. The
recirculation mode will also be used as needed to
maintain cool outlet temperatures.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outlet Adjustment
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Your vehicle has air outlets located in the center and on
the side of your instrument panel that allow you to adjust
the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle.
Move the louvers up or down. Use the thumbwheel next
to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers. For the
most efficient airflow and temperature control, keep the
outlet in the fully opened position.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout your
vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there
may be a problem, check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your vehicle,
such as hood-air deflectors, etc., may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States version shown. Canada similar.
The instrument cluster is designed to let show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going,
about how much fuel the vehicle has left and many other things needed to drive safely and economically.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminders
The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind a driver to fasten the safety
belt, unless the driver safety belt is already buckled.
The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been
driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
The safety belt light comes
on and stays on for
several seconds, then
flashes for several more.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has
been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument
panel cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed resets it.
This chime and light are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver
safety belt is already buckled, neither the chime nor the
light comes on.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Airbag Readiness Light
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime
sounds for several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety belt. This only occurs if
the passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, comes on and stays on for several seconds and
then flashes for several more.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates
there is an electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
The airbag readiness light
flashes for a few seconds
when the engine is
started. If the light does
not come on then, have it
fixed immediately.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light comes on.
The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime
may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a
briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other
electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or
chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle
the safety belt.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
important safety information. The overhead console has
a passenger airbag status indicator.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after the
vehicle is started or comes on while driving, it
means the airbag system might not be working
properly. The airbags in the vehicle might not
inflate in a crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come
for more information.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are
using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if
equipped, you may not see the system check.
Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol
to let you know the status of the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger
frontal airbag.
Charging System Light
This light comes on briefly
when the ignition key is
turned to START, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a
problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION:
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and
stays on, it means that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help avoid injury to
yourself or others, have the vehicle serviced right
for more information, including important safety
information.
The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a
problem with the charging system. A charging system
message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also
for more information. This light could indicate that
there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that
there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right
away. If the vehicle must be driven a short distance with
the light on, turn off accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create full power. If
there is a problem with the battery charging system, this
light will come on or the SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM DIC message will display. See
information.
Voltmeter Gage
When the engine is not
running, but the ignition is
on, this gage shows
the battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The charging system
regulates voltage based on the state of the battery
for improved fuel economy and battery life. The gage
may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings between the low
and high warning zones indicate the normal operating
range. The gage may also read low during the fuel
economy mode, this is normal.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is
turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem.
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light
comes on when the parking brake is set. If the vehicle
is driven with the parking brake engaged, a chime
sounds when the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
{ CAUTION:
The vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop the vehicle. For good braking,
both parts need to be working well.
The brake system might not be working properly if
the brake system warning light is on. Driving with
the brake system warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has
been pulled off the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for service.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have the brake system
inspected right away.
This light can also come on due to low brake fluid. See
If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and
stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push or
might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop. If
the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service.
United States
Canada
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
The StabiliTrak indicator
light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
For vehicles with the
Antilock Brake System
(ABS), this light comes on
briefly when the engine
is started.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
If the light comes on and stays on on while driving,
there might be a problem with the StabiliTrak®
system and the vehicle may need service. When this
warning light is on, the system is off and does not limit
wheel spin.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light
comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely
possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine
again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on,
or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs
service. If the regular brake system warning light is not
on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock
brakes. If the regular brake system warning light is also
on, the vehicle does not have antilock brakes and
there is a problem with the regular brakes. See Brake
The light flashes if the system is active and is working
to assist the driver with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
information.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC), see
related DIC messages.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
Tire Pressure Light
For vehicles with a tire
pressure light, this light
comes on briefly when the
engine is started and
provides information about
tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring
System.
When the Light is On Steady
United States
Canada
This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly
underinflated.
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
A tire pressure message in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC
information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is
safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the
information.
It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage will
read 210°F (100°C) or less. If the vehicle is pulling a
load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If
the gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while
the engine is running, this indicates that there is an
OBD II problem and service is required.
When the Light Flashes First and Then is
On Steady
This indicates that there could be a problem with the
Tire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats with
every ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 5-64 for more information.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This
system assists the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls
might not work as well, the vehicle’s fuel economy
might not be as good, and the engine might not
run as smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs
that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems. It
ensures that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure to pass a required
Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. See
This light should come on
when the ignition is on, but
the engine is not running,
as a check to show it
is working. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on during a malfunction in one of
two ways:
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should
turn the light off.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition has been detected.
A misfire increases vehicle emissions and could damage
the emission control system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
• If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle
of water, the vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
To prevent more serious damage to the vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Make sure to fuel the vehicle with quality fuel. Poor
fuel quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed and can cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is changed into gear,
misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on
acceleration. These conditions might go away once
the engine is warmed up.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• If towing a trailer, reduce the amount of cargo being
hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous
steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon
as possible.
If one or more of these conditions occurs, change the
fuel brand used. It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Light On Steady: An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
If none of the above have made the light turn off, your
dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix
any mechanical or electrical problems that might have
developed.
An emission system malfunction might be corrected by
doing the following:
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Gage
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle registration.
Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass
an inspection:
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on with the engine running, or if the
key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on.
United States
Canada
• The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle
would be considered not ready for inspection.
This can happen if the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has run down. The
diagnostic system is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during normal driving. This
can take several days of routine driving. If this
has been done and the vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD II system readiness,
your dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for
inspection.
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in
psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is
running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure
zone, the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
message will appear in the Driver Information Center
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as
possible.
Oil Pressure Light
{ CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The
engine can become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light comes on briefly while starting the engine.
If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the
indicator light then goes off.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light comes
on when the fog lamps are
in use.
If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is
not flowing through the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and it might have some other system
problem.
Security Light
The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off.
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
page 2-28.
Cruise Control Light
The cruise control light
comes on whenever the
cruise control is set.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highbeam On Light
Fuel Gage
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
for more information.
United States
Canada
Tow/Haul Mode Light
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage shows how much
fuel the vehicle has left in the tank.
This light comes on when
the Tow/Haul mode has
been activated.
An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the
vehicle the fuel door is on.
The gage first indicates empty before the vehicle is out
of fuel, and the fuel tank should be filled soon.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC).
more information.
Low Fuel Warning Light
This light, under the fuel
gage, comes on briefly
while the engine is being
started.
Here are some situations customers may experience
with the fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with
the fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
This light and a chime comes on when the fuel tank is
low on fuel. The Driver Information Center also displays
a “FUEL LEVEL LOW” message. See DIC Warnings
fuel is added this light and message should go off. If
it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
• The gage goes back to empty when the ignition is
turned off.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also
displays warning messages if a system problem is
detected.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below
explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument
panel, next to the steering wheel.
All messages will appear in the DIC display located
below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC will display the information that was
last displayed before the engine was turned off.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC Operation and
Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later in this section and
page 3-67 for the displays available.
The DIC also allows some features to be customized.
on page 3-67 for more information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the
trip odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC
displays. See “DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons)” later in this section.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons)” later in
this section for the displays available.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Buttons
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display
the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles
with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), trailer
brake gain and output information for vehicles with
the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,
engine hours, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming, compass zone setting, and compass
recalibration.
The buttons are the
trip/fuel, vehicle
information, customization,
and set/reset buttons.
The button functions are
detailed in the following
pages.
U (Customization): Press this button to customize
the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
information.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain
functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages
on the DIC.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometer, fuel range, average economy,
fuel used, timer, and transmission temperature. The
compass and outside air temperature will also be
shown in the display. The temperature will be shown in
°F or °C depending on the units selected.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the
following menu items:
Odometer
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
set/reset button for at least four seconds. The trip
odometer will display the number of miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last turned
on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays.
This display shows the distance the vehicle has
been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display
the odometer.
To switch between English and metric measurements,
see “Units” later in this section.
Trip Odometer
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This
display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the
trip odometer. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will also display the trip odometer.
Fuel Range
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can
be driven without refueling. The display will show
LOW if the fuel level is low.
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing the
set/reset button while the trip odometer is displayed.
You can also reset the trip odometer while it is displayed
by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the
vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This estimate
will change if driving conditions change. For example, if
driving in traffic and making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the vehicle is driven on a
freeway, the number may change even though the same
amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different fuel economies.
Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel economy
than city driving. Fuel range cannot be reset.
Timer
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays. This
display can be used as a timer.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the amount
of time that has passed since the timer was last
reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time will
continue to be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being shown on the DIC.
The timer will record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which the display will
return to zero.
Average Economy
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY displays.
This display shows the approximate average miles
per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of
mpg (L/100 km) recorded since the last time this menu
item was reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press
and hold the set/reset button.
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while
TIMER is displayed.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset
button while TIMER is displayed.
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays.
This display shows the temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or
degrees Celsius (°C).
Fuel Used
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED displays.
This display shows the number of gallons (gal) or
liters (L) of fuel used since the last reset of this menu
item. To reset the fuel used information, press and hold
the set/reset button while FUEL USED is displayed.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
Units
Oil Life
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this
display, press the set/reset button to select between
ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information
will then be displayed in the unit of measurement
selected.
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
Tire Pressure
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
more information.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), the pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press
the vehicle information button until the DIC displays
FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the
vehicle information button again until the DIC displays
REAR TIRES PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to
check the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the
information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
Relearn Remote Key
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an RKE
transmitter to your vehicle:
Trailer Gain and Output
1. Press the vehicle information button until
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the
DIC. Press the vehicle information button until
TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display.
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting,
see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime
a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is
displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in
the OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake
for more information.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
Engine Hours
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Press the vehicle information button until ENGINE
HOURS displays. This display shows the total number
of hours the engine has run.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can use
the trip odometer reset stem to view the following
displays: odometer, engine hours, trip odometer,
compass zone setting, compass recalibration, oil life,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming,
and display language.
Compass Zone Setting
This display allows for setting the compass zone. See
DIC Compass on page 3-55
Compass Recalibration
This display allows for calibrating the compass. See DIC
Compass on page 3-55
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the trip
odometer reset stem to view the following displays:
odometer, engine hours, trip odometer, and display
language.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
Odometer
DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)
Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
information below explains the operation of this system.
Engine Hours
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the
instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC
messages.
To display the ENGINE HOURS, place the ignition in
LOCK/OFF or ACC/ACCESSORY, then press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for four seconds while
viewing the ODOMETER. This display shows the total
number of hours the engine has run.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information,
and warning messages if a system problem is detected.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trip Odometer
Transmission Temperature
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset
for the trip odometer.
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP
displays. This display shows the temperature of the
automatic transmission fluid in either degrees
Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C).
The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and
holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip
odometer is displayed.
Trailer Gain and Output
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the
DIC. Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRAILER
GAIN and OUTPUT display.
The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active
reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to
the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition
was last turned on. This can be used if the trip
odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip.
TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This
setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a
trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting,
see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the number of miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) driven since the ignition was last
turned on and the vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle
begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate
mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then the
retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will
show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the
display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime
a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is
displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in
the OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake
for more information.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself.
Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display
accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the
next oil change. To reset the engine oil life system, see
Compass Zone Setting
This display allows for setting the compass zone. See
Compass Recalibration
This display allows for calibrating the compass. See DIC
Relearn Remote Key
Oil Life
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match an
RKE transmitter to your vehicle:
To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park).
Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate
of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE
REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the
current oil life remains. The engine oil life system
will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent
with your driving conditions.
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN
REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for
three seconds.
The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
will display.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the display.
See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under DIC
page 5-15. In addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional maintenance is
recommended in the Maintenance Schedule in this
more information.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the
first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter is
matched.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 3.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle may have a compass in the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the
key to LOCK/OFF.
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Language
This display allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear. To select a language:
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or
province, it will be necessary to compensate for
compass variance by resetting the zone through the
DIC if the zone is not set correctly.
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays.
2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold
the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until
the currently set language displays.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the
compass is not set to the zone where you live, the
compass may give false readings. The compass must
be set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is
traveling.
3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset
stem to scroll through all of the available languages.
The available languages are ENGLISH (default),
FRANCAIS (French), ESPANOL (Spanish), and NO
CHANGE.
4. Once the desired language is displayed, release
the trip odometer reset stem to set your choice.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park).
Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays.
Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons,
press the trip odometer reset stem until CHANGE
COMPASS ZONE displays.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading, for
example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC. Or, if
the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press and
hold the trip odometer reset stem for two seconds to
select the next available variance zone. Repeat this
step until the appropriate variance zone is displayed.
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass zone is set to the variance zone in
which the vehicle is located. See “Compass
Variance (Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
Compass Calibration
2. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO CALIBRATE COMPAS (Compass)
displays. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, press the trip odometer reset stem until
CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in
circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers, or
other industrial structures, if possible.
3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass
calibration. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC
buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem
for two seconds to start the compass calibration.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING: DRIVE IN
CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete the calibration. The
DIC will display CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a
few seconds when the calibration is complete. The
DIC display will then return to the previous menu.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for example,
N for North, or the heading does not change after
making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna
mount, a magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad
holder, or any other magnetic item. Turn off the
vehicle, move the magnetic item, then turn on the
vehicle and calibrate the compass.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
DIC Warnings and Messages
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some
action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in
one or more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked.
This message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT
FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which
tire needs to be checked. You can receive more than
one tire pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the same
time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer
reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
on page 5-63. The DIC also shows the tire pressure
values. See “DIC Operation and Displays (With
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument
panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument
panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from the display.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can be cleared. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
DIC Buttons)” earlier in this section. If the tire pressure
is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the engine oil needs to be
changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to
reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message. See
information.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message may display and a chime
may sound when one of the following conditions exists:
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out
of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
• A trailer with electric brakes becomes disconnected
from the vehicle.
− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
stopped, this message clears itself after a short
time.
ENGINE HOT A/C (Air Conditioning)
TURNED OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor automatically turns off. When
the coolant temperature returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns back on. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
− If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
moving, this message stays on until the ignition
is turned off.
• There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer
brakes.
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle
over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off.
Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the
ignition back on. This message clears if the trailer is
reconnected. This message also clears if you
acknowledge it. If this message still displays, either
your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your
dealer/retailer.
If this message continues to appear, have the system
repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible
to avoid damage to the engine.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe temperatures for
operation. Stop and turn off the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so to avoid severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled to a safe operating
temperature.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is
overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
cooling system temperature gets too hot and the engine
further enters the engine coolant protection mode.
information.
page 5-33 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,
but there is no reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The performance may be reduced
the next time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may
be driven at a reduced speed while this message is on,
but acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be taken
to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If
an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the fuel
level is low. Refuel as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
information.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver
side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
HEATED WASHER FLUID SYSTEM OFF
This message displays when the heated windshield
page 3-10 for more information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES
PENDING
This message displays when the heated windshield
washer system is heating the fluid. See Windshield
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and
do not operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure
has been corrected. Check the oil as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is
not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the
hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to
see if the message still appears on the DIC.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when ice conditions are possible.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK ASSIST OFF
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, after the vehicle has been started, this
message displays to remind the driver that the URPA
system has been turned off. Press the set/reset
button or the trip odometer reset stem to acknowledge
this message and clear it from the DIC display. To
turn the URPA system back on, see Ultrasonic Rear
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”
on page 2-5.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the front
passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is
shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears on
the DIC.
SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE
This message displays if a problem occurs with the
four-wheel-drive system. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Make
sure the key is in the LOCK/OFF position for at least
one minute and then restart the vehicle and check
for the message on the DIC display. If the message is
still displayed or appears again when you begin
driving, the four-wheel-drive system needs service. See
your dealer/retailer.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle” under
information.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AIR BAG
SERVICE BRAKES SOON
This message displays if there is a problem with the
airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect
the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light
information.
This message displays if there is a problem with the
brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as
possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle
and check for the message on the DIC display. If
the message is still displayed or appears again when
you begin driving, the brake system needs service. See
your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a
problem with the battery charging system. Under certain
conditions, the charging system light may also turn
on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System
drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories.
Have the electrical system checked as soon as
possible. See your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA) system, this message displays if there is a
problem with the URPA system. Do not use this system
to help you park. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
your dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak® and this message
displays, it means there may be a problem with the
StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to reset
the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least
15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message
still comes on, it means there is a problem. You
should see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle
is safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit
of StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed and drive
accordingly.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake system
warning light if there is a problem with the brake system.
message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off
the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the
message on the DIC display. If the message is still
displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the
brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
If your vehicle has the Autoride® suspension system,
this message displays when the Autoride suspension
system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when there is a problem with the Traction Control
System (TCS). When this message displays, the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem with
the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or may not
restart so you may want to take the vehicle to your
dealer/retailer before turning off the engine. See
page 2-30 for more information.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message displays and a chime
sounds when there is a problem with the ITBC system.
When this message displays, power is no longer
available to the trailer brakes.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle
over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off.
Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the
ignition back on. If this message still displays, either your
vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your
dealer/retailer.
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is
not working properly. The tire pressure light also
flashes and then remains on during the same ignition
conditions may cause this message to appear. See Tire
information. If the warning comes on and stays on, there
may be a problem with the TPMS. See your
dealer/retailer.
See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The message could display if the stability system
takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic
checks due to driving conditions.
STABILITRAK OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when you turn off StabiliTrak, or when the stability
control has been automatically disabled. To limit wheel
spin and realize the full benefits of the stability
enhancement system, you should normally leave
StabiliTrak on. However, you should turn StabiliTrak off
if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow
and you want to rock your vehicle to attempt to free it,
or if you are driving in extreme off-road conditions
and require more wheel spin. See If Your Vehicle is
• The message displays if an engine or vehicle
related problem has been detected and the vehicle
needs service. See your dealer/retailer.
• The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted
into 4LO.
The message turns off as soon as the conditions that
caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s
fuel cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap
allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn
this light and message off.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message also displays if the brake system
warning light is on. See Brake System Warning
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT” under DIC Operation
page 3-52 and “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System”
information.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS), this message displays when the TPMS
is re-learning the tire positions on your vehicle. The tire
positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires
or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire Inspection
page 5-63 for more information.
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays
when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned
TRAILER CONNECTED
This message displays along with a sound if the
transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with
the transmission fluid temperature high can cause
damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This message clears
and the chime stops when the fluid temperature reaches
a safe level.
On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control
(ITBC) system, this message displays briefly when
a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to
the vehicle.
This message clears itself after several seconds. This
message also clears if you acknowledge it. After
this message clears, the TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT
display appears in the DIC.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a turn
signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km). Move the turn
signal/multifunction lever to the off position.
To change customization preferences, use the following
procedure.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
P (Park).
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield washer
fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as
soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-14 for the location of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are turned off.
2. Press the customization button to scroll through the
available customizable options.
Feature Settings Menu Items
DIC Vehicle Customization
(With DIC Buttons)
The following are customization features that allow you
to program settings to the vehicle:
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program certain features to one preferred
setting. Customization features can only be programmed
to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed
to a preferred setting for two different drivers.
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other than
English has been set. This feature allows you to change
the language in which the DIC messages appear to
English.
All of the customization options may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the options available will be
displayed on the DIC.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V TO
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH screen appears on the DIC
display. Press the set/reset button once to display all
DIC messages in English.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
AUTO DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC messages will appear.
This feature allows you to select when the vehicle’s
doors will automatically lock. See Programmable
information.
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
English.
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors, including
the tailgate, will automatically lock when the vehicle
is shifted out of P (Park).
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors, including the tailgate,
will automatically lock when the vehicle speed is
above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
You can also change the language by pressing the trip
odometer reset stem. See “Language” under DIC
Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) earlier in
this section for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn
off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also
allows you to select which doors and when the doors
will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback
you will receive when locking the vehicle with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not
receive feedback when locking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to scroll
through the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press the
lock button on the RKE transmitter.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors, including the
tailgate, will unlock when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash when you
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second press
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors, including the
tailgate, will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into
P (Park).
of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter, and the horn will sound when the lock button
is pressed again within five seconds of the previous
command.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select whether or not the
locking of the vehicle’s doors and tailgate will be delayed.
When locking the doors and tailgate with the power door
lock switch and a door or the tailgate is open, this feature
will delay locking the doors and tailgate until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to
signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. The key
must be out of the ignition for this feature to work. You
can temporarily override delayed locking by pressing the
power door lock switch twice or the lock button on the
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you
will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive
feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless
information.
page 2-11 for more information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until DELAY DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash when
you press the unlock button on the RKE transmitter.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of the vehicle’s
doors.
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on the RKE
transmitter.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door or the tailgate is closed.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of time you
want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark
enough outside. This happens after the key is turned
from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to have
the exterior lights turn on briefly during low light
periods after unlocking the vehicle using the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on
for 30 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the exterior
lights will turn on briefly when you unlock the vehicle
with the RKE transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until the lock
button on the RKE transmitter is pressed, or the
vehicle is no longer off. See Remote Keyless Entry
information.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level of the
chime.
Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted down
when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will be
tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal
level.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
R (Reverse).
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s outside
mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into R (Reverse).
There is no default for chime volume. The volume will
stay at the last known setting.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
whether or not the outside mirror(s) will automatically tilt
down when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
more information.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
EASY EXIT RECALL
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature.
for more information.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EASY EXIT SETUP
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
which areas will recall with the automatic easy exit seat
feature. It also allows you to turn off the automatic
easy exit feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
on page 1-8 and “EASY EXIT RECALL” earlier for
more information.
DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall
will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing
the easy exit seat button.
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SETUP
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button
once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the menu up/down button to scroll through the
following settings:
BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If the features are
enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu,
the driver’s seat will move back when the key is
removed from the ignition or after pressing the easy exit
seat button.
OFF: No automatic seat exit will recall.
SEAT ONLY (Default): The driver’s seat will recall.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only occur
one time after the key is removed from the ignition. If the
automatic movement has already occurred, and you put
the key back in the ignition and remove it again, the seat
will stay in the original exit position, unless a memory
recall took place prior to removing the key again.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
REMOTE START
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select
your preference for the remote memory seat recall
feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals
on page 1-8 for more information.
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to turn the
remote start off or on. The remote start feature allows
you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. See
Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT
RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature.
Then press the customization button to scroll through
the following settings:
Press the customization button until REMOTE START
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to access the settings for this feature. Then
press the customization button to scroll through the
following settings:
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur.
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the
outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored
driving position when the unlock button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. On
some vehicles with the adjustable throttle and brake
pedal feature, the pedals will also automatically move.
See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation
page 3-52 for more information on matching transmitters
to driver ID numbers.
ON (default): The remote start feature will be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature.
The current setting will remain.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FACTORY SETTINGS
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
This feature allows you to set all of the customization
features back to their factory default settings.
The feature settings menu will be exited when any of
the following occurs:
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
• The vehicle is no longer in ON/RUN.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons are
pressed.
• The end of the feature settings menu is reached
and exited.
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
will be set to their factory default settings.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will
not be set to their factory default settings.
To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the
desired setting is displayed on the DIC.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
This feature allows you to exit the feature settings menu.
Press the customization button until PRESS V TO EXIT
FEATURE SETTINGS appears in the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to exit the menu.
If you do not exit, pressing the customization button
again will return you to the beginning of the feature
settings menu.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving,
do the following while the vehicle is parked:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the
following pages to become familiar with its features.
• Become familiar with the operation and controls of
the audio system.
• Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset
radio stations.
{ CAUTION:
page 4-2.
Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods
could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to
you or others. Do not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Notice: Contact your dealer/retailer before adding
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication equipment could
interfere with the operation of the vehicle’s engine,
radio, or other systems, and could damage them.
Follow federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
This system provides access to many audio and non
audio listings.
The vehicle has Retained Accessory Power (RAP). With
RAP, the audio system can be played even after the
ignition is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
Setting the Clock
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a
Single CD and DVD Player
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and
DVD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting the
time and date.
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is currently
displayed on the radio screen until the time 12H and
24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY (month, day,
and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day, month, and year)
displays.
To set the time and date:
1. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to change it. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
3. Press the H button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨SEEK arrow or
the \ FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left © SEEK arrow or the s REV (reverse)
button, or turn the f (tune) knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio, to adjust the
selected setting.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the
radio has a MENU button instead of the H (clock)
button to set the time and date.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
To set the time and date:
1. Press the MENU button.
1. Press the MENU button. Once the H option
displays, press the pushbutton located under
the forward arrow that is currently displayed on the
radio screen until the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
and the date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
2. Once the H (clock) option displays, press the
pushbutton located under that label. The HR,
MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day,
and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to change it. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the selected
default, or let the screen time out.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or
the \ FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left ©SEEK arrow or the s REV (reverse)
button, or turn the f (tune) knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio, to adjust the
selected setting.
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the
station name or call letters displays. In rare cases, a
radio station could broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
Radios with CD and DVD
Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose® Surround
Sound System. Some of its features are explained later
in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)”.
Playing the Radio
If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-119
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate.
The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed
DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS
Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.).
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): Radios with
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV) automatically
adjusts the radio volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up or slows down. The
volume level should be consistent while driving.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
To activate SCV:
Radio Data System (RDS)
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS). The
RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
(automatic volume) label on the radio displays.
3-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired Speed
Compensated Volume setting (OFF, Low, Med,
or High) to select the level of radio volume
compensation. The display times out after
approximately 10 seconds. Each higher setting
increases the audio volume to compensate for faster
vehicle speeds.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO VOLUM
label on the radio display.
4. Press the pushbutton under the ON label. The
display times out after approximately 10 seconds.
For additional information on AudioPilot®, please visit
bose.com/audiopilot.
Finding a Station
Noise Compensation Technology: Vehicles with The
LTZ package and a Bose® Audio System include the
Bose AudioPilot® noise compensation technology. When
turned on, AudioPilot® continuously adjusts the audio
system equalization, to compensate for background
noise, so that music always sounds the same at the set
volume level.
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped). The selection displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
©SEEK ¨: Press either SEEK arrow to go to the
This feature is most effective at lower radio volume
settings where background noise can affect how well the
music is heard. At higher volume settings, where the
music is much louder than the background noise, there
might be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot®.
previous or to the next station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to a
station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To activate:
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The balance/fade and tone settings that were previously
adjusted, are stored with the favorite stations.
4 (Information) (XM Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
and RDS Features): Press to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, press 4 to display
the time. For vehicles with XM, MP3, WMA or RDS
features, press 4 to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or
CD, MP3 or WMA song. If information is available during
XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the song title
information displays on the top line of the display and
artist information displays on the bottom line. When
information is not available, “NO INFO” displays.
To store a station as a favorite:
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where the
station is to be stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
to be stored as a favorite.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using the
MENU button. To setup the number of favorites pages:
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite
stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering
wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages by
pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button).
Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages
of favorites, each having six favorite stations available
per page. Each page of favorites can contain any
combination of AM, FM, or XM (if equipped) stations.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
3-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose bass
and treble equalization settings designed for different
types of music. The choices are pop, rock, country, talk,
jazz, and classical. Selecting MANUAL or changing
bass or treble, returns the EQ to the manual bass and
treble settings.
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing
either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward), or s REV
(reverse) button until the desired levels are obtained. If
a station’s frequency is weak or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If the radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ settings
are either MANUAL or TALK.
Digital Signal Processing (DSP): Press the EQ button
to change the DSP settings (only available on Bose®
systems with the LTZ option package). DSP settings
provide a choice of different listening experiences.
The following DSP settings are available:
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
• Normal — Select this setting to adjust the audio for
normal mode. This provides the best sound quality
for all seating positions.
• Driver — Select this setting to adjust the audio for
the driver to receive the best possible sound
quality.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
• Rear — Select this setting to adjust the audio for
the rear seat passengers to receive the best
possible sound quality.
3-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Surround (Centerpoint®) — Select this setting to
enable Bose Centerpoint®. Centerpoint® signal
processing produces a surround sound listening
experience from a CD or XM stereo digital
audio source. Centerpoint® delivers five
independent audio channels from conventional
two channel stereo recordings. (Not available for
AM or FM.)
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the radio
disables FADE and the rear speakers mute.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM
stations when the radio is in the XM mode. To find
XM channels within a desired category:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the
desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting.
Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either
• Radios with CD and DVD can also navigate the
category list by pressing the s REV button or
the \ FWD button.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first XM
station associated with that category.
SEEK arrow, \ FWD, or s REV button until the
desired levels are obtained.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow
to go to the previous or to the next XM station
within the selected category.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or
FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds
and the level adjusts to the middle position.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display favorites again.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds.
3-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM categories can be removed through the
setup menu. To remove an undesired category:
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
XM CAT label.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be
XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian
provinces. XM Satellite Radio has a wide variety
of programming and commercial-free music,
coast-to-coast, and in digital-quality sound. During your
trial or when you subscribe, you will get unlimited
access to XM Radio Online for when you are not in the
vehicle. A service fee is required to receive the XM
service. For more information, contact XM at
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
xmradio.com or call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
xmradio.ca or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Categories cannot be removed or added while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Radio Messages for XM Only
section for further detail.
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for the vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for the vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
3-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off while a CD is in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays. As
each new track starts to play, the track number displays.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^ : Press this button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
To insert one CD:
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
in 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and in 30 seconds for a
DVD, depending on media type and format ranges.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs:
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds. A
If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The
CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or
page 3-128 for more information. The DVD/CD decks,
(upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD
deck) of the radio are compatible with most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.
beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. To
insert a CD while the ignition is off, first press
the Z button or the DISP knob.
3-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD
symbol displays on the left side of the radio display. As
each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught in the
CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal
computer and a description label is needed, try labeling
the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due
to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism.
Care of CDs
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one
CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is
made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD
player could be damaged. While using the CD player,
use only CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player and the
loading slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R or CD-RW quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the way
the CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. Handle them
carefully. Store CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s) in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD or DVD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD
does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Z EJECT or CD (Eject): Press and release
to eject the disc that is currently playing. A CD ejecting
from a radio with CD and DVD, ejects from the bottom
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once
the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The disc
can be removed. If the disc is not removed, after
several seconds, the disc automatically pulls back into
the player.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, clean it with a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water. Make sure the
wiping process starts from the center to the edge.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold for
two seconds to eject all discs.
3-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release to eject the disc
that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep
sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a
reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
If loading and reading of a disc cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order. To use random:
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD
player. A RDM label displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD that is
currently playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
For Radios with CD and DVD, Press the left arrow to go
to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds
on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on the
CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the right
arrow to go to the next track.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the ^ button. A beep sounds
and Load All Discs displays. Insert one or more discs
partway into the slot of the CD player.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to resume
playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
To play the tracks from a CD loaded in the radio with
CD and DVD, press the DVD/CD AUX button when
not sourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway into
the slot. A RDM label displays.
3-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To play tracks from a single CD in random order,
press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD
slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected, the
DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available
options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and
Rear Auxiliary (if available). See “Using the Auxiliary
Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
Jacks” under, Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-119 for more information.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio while a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
For the radio with CD and DVD, press to listen to the
radio while a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or
DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or for
viewing entertainment.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use
the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while
listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing the disc and/or track number displays when a
CD is in the player. Press again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device,
such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio
player is not connected, “No Input Device Found”
displays.
Radios with CD and DVD Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at a time. An audio source is defined as DVD
slot, CD slot, XM, FM/AM, Front Auxiliary Jack, or
Rear Auxiliary Jack.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing the track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
Press the O button to turn the radio on. The radio can
be heard through all of the vehicle speakers.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM, FM,
or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the
DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD slot, front,
or rear auxiliary input (if available).
3-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s front
auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack, the
front seat passengers are able to listen to playback from
this source through the vehicle speakers. See “Using
the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this section, or
“Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear Seat
information.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or
radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC
and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs.
Radios with a CD and DVD player could display other
messages when an error occurs:
Optical Error: The disc was inserted upside down.
In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the rear
speakers can be muted when the RSA power is
for more information.
Disk Read Error: A disc was inserted with an invalid or
unknown format.
Player Error: There are disc LOAD or disc EJECT
problems.
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Radios with a Single CD or a Six-Disc CD player have
the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW
disc. For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R
or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• The road is very rough. When the road becomes
smoother, the CD should play.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
Radios with a CD and DVD player have the capability of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For
more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
3-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
Playing a DVD
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If
a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such as:
DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-119
for more information.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide it
to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
Using the DVD Player
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the
remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons
on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-119
information.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the
appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of
most DVDs.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio
CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio,
DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and
WMA formats.
O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds
to turn off the radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system, and to start the parental control feature.
Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from
operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote
control.
If an error message displays on the video screen or the
radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-119
and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this section for
more information.
3-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A lock symbol displays next to the clock display. The
parental control feature remains on until this knob
is pressed and held for more than two seconds again,
or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the
vehicle.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press to fast forward the CD
or DVD. The radio displays the elapsed time and fast
forwards five times the normal speed. To stop fast
forwarding, press again. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to
manually tune a radio station, or to change clock or date
settings, while in the clock or date setting mode. See
the information given earlier in this section specific to the
radio, CD, and the DVD. Also, see “Setting the Clock”
in the index, for setting the clock and date.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or DVD. If
a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed, the player
automatically pulls it back in after 15 seconds.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
because of an unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to
eject, press and hold this button for more than
five seconds to force the disc to eject.
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press the left
arrow to return to the start of the current track or
chapter. Press the left arrow again to go to the previous
track or chapter. This button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during
DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for
more information.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press the right
arrow to go to the next track or chapter. This button
might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control. See
“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is
inserted into the DVD slot.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the
CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio
displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. To stop
fast reversing, press again. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
3-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the
forward arrow is showing on display, the system is in
pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on display, the
system is in playback mode. If the DVD screen is off,
press the play button to turn the screen on.
q (Return): Press to exit the current active menu
and return to the previous menu. This button operates
only when a DVD is playing and a menu is active.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up to
30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the
movie automatically, press the pushbutton located under
the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. If
the DVD still does not play, refer to the on-screen
instructions, if available.
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows
several tag options for DVD playing. Press the
pushbuttons located under any desired tag option
during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after,
for more information.
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus
and controls through the remote control. See “Remote
Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System
on page 3-119 for more information. The Video
Screen does not automatically power on when the
DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually
turned on by the rear seat occupant through the
remote control power button.
c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast
forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are
highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD
menu is different on every DVD. Use the pushbuttons
located under the navigation arrows to navigate
the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a
selection press this button. This button only operates
when using a DVD.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause
icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between
pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the
forward arrow is showing on the display, the system is
in pause mode. If the pause icon is showing on the
display, the system is in playback mode.
3-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
q Group r: Press to cycle through musical groupings
on the DVD-A disc.
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system,
press the c button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause
symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is
sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the
DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
Nav (Navigate): Press to display directional arrows for
navigating through the menus.
e (Audio Stream): Press to cycle through audio
stream formats located on the DVD-A disc. The video
screen shows the audio stream changing.
To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button
on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located
under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the
radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last
stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote
control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop
button has been pressed twice on the remote control,
the disc resumes playing at the beginning of the disc.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label side
up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might not
accept some paper labeled media. The player starts
loading the disc into the system and shows “Loading
Disc” on the radio display. At the same time, the radio
displays a softkey menu of option(s). Some discs
automatically play the movie while others default to the
softkey menu display, which requires the radio’s
Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to be pressed. The
rear seat passenger can also start the disc with the
remote control.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc. If a
disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the radio
reloads the disc after a short period of time. The disc is
stored in the radio. The radio does not resume play of the
disc automatically. If the RSA system is sourced to the
DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVD player
begins to play again. In case loading and reading of a
DVD or CD cannot be completed (unknown format, etc.),
Loading a disc into the system, depending on media
type and format, ranges from 5 to 20 seconds for a CD,
and up to 30 seconds for a DVD.
and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD Z
button more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
3-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
DVD Radio Error Messages
Player Error: This message displays when there are
disc load or eject problems.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the disc
is inserted with the disc label wrong side up, or if
the disc is damaged.
For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio
device’s volume to the loudest level.
It is always best to power the portable audio device
through its own battery while playing.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the disc
is not from a correct region.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no disc is
present when the Z or DVD/CD AUX button is
pressed on the radio.
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of
the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might have to be made from the portable device if the
volume is not loud or soft enough.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device also
continues to play.
The radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an
audio output; do not plug the headphone set into the
front auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such
as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD player,
or cassette tape player, etc. can be connected to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another audio source.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive
distraction.
3-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and does not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If
a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such as:
DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-119
for more information.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player)
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and
album are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. By
default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left
side of the screen but plays both file formats in the
order in which they were recorded to the disc.
3-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 Format
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders, or
playlists could cause the player to be unable to play
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions. To play a large number of files, folders,
playlists or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist name. Long names also take up
more space on the display, potentially getting cut off.
Burning an MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R or
CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on one disc.
• Make sure the CD does not have more than a
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders
and files to read and play.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the disc
not to function in the player.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using
one folder for each album. Each folder or album
should contain 18 songs or less.
Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous)
and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the
©SEEK ¨ arrows. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that have
been recorded without using file folders can be played. If
a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum
of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files, the
player allows access and navigates up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum are not accessible.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u extension as other
file extensions might not work.
3-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root Directory
Order of Play
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a
folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as the CD label. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA)
and MP3 files, a folder under the root directory called
CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
No Folder
The song name that displays is the song name that is
contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present
in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name
without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name.
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and up buttons search
playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
3-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
automatically pulls back into the player and begins
playing. For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3 files on the
CD-R currently playing.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds
have played. Press the right SEEK arrow to go to
the next MP3 file. If either SEEK arrow is held or
pressed multiple times, the player continues moving
backward or forward through MP3 files on the CD.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the load button and wait for
the message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label
side up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected
audio source.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound will
be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file
displays.
Z EJECT: Press this button to eject CD-R(s) or
CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing, press and release this button. A beep sounds
and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
3-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the CD-R or CD-RW. The radio can begin playing while
it is scanning the disc in the background. When the
scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins playing
again.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound
will be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button
to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist
are played, the player moves to the next artist in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files by that artist. To listen to MP3 files by
another artist, press the pushbutton located below
either arrow button. The next or previous artist in
alphabetical order plays. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist is displayed.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on
the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW or
all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do
one of the following:
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW in
random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current
Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the
back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name is displayed on the second
line between the arrows and songs from the current
album begins to play. Once all songs from that album
are played, the player moves to the next album in
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3 files from that album.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again
to turn off random play.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located
below the music navigator label. The player scans the
disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag
information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3 files recorded to
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
3-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD remains safely inside the radio for
future listening.
MP3/WMA Format
Burning an MP3/WMA disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays when a CD is
in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA files on
one disc.
• The CD player (lower slot) is able to read and play
a maximum combination of 512 files and folders.
The DVD player (upper slot) is able to read
255 folders, 15 playlists and 40 sessions.
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD and
DVD Player)
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3/WMA files
depending on which slot the disc is loaded into. By default
the radio reads only the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and
ignores the MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CD
deck, press the CAT (category) button to toggle between
compressed and uncompressed audio format, the default
being the uncompressed format (.CDA).
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u extension as other
file extensions might not work.
3-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists could cause the player to be unable
to play up to the maximum number of files, folders,
playlists, or sessions. To play a large number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize
the length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long
names also take up more space on the display,
potentially getting cut off.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player
advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder function does not function on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc could cause the
disc not to function in the player.
Root Directory
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under the
root folder. The folder down and the folder up buttons
search playlists (Px) first and then goes to the root
folder. When the radio displays the name of the folder
the radio displays ROOT.
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio
files, the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All
files contained directly under the root directory are
accessed prior to any root directory folders. However,
playlists (Px) are always accessed before root folders
or files.
3-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder and
continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of the
first folder.
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either the top or
bottom slot, label side up. The player pulls it in, and
the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey menu
appears and allows navigation of the disc. The
menu reads left to right as RDM (Randomize song play
order), a Folder icon with left and right arrows (to
move up or down through available folders), a PL tag if
the disc has a Playlist available, and a Music Navigator
tag. If a Playlist tag is shown, toggling this key brings
up a Folder softkey only or the menu as previously
described.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
folder mode has been chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
The song name that is displayed is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned back on, the CD-R starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename displays.
3-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to the
start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds have
played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
If either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple times,
the player continues moving backward or forward
through the MP3/WMA files on the CD.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the
bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays.
Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The
CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or
CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed,
such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold this button for more than five seconds
to force the disc to eject.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top
slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the
disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or
CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD-R automatically
pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD
cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and
the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more
than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. Sound
is heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to
resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the
file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file.
Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of
the file displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files on
the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing.
3-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in
random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA
files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press
the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
To listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press the
pushbutton located below either arrow button. The
disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical
order. Continue pressing either button until the desired
artist is displayed.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By
label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons
below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the
back label to return to the main music navigator
screen. Now the album name displays on the second
line between the arrows and songs from the current
album begin to play. Once all songs from that album are
played, the player moves to the next album in
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW
in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton
located below the music navigator label. The player
scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3
tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the
disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA files
recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins
playing MP3/WMA files from that album.
To cancel music navigator while the player is scanning,
press the pushbutton located below the music
navigator label or eject the disc.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the
CD-R or CD-RW begins playing again.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside
the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The current
artist playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows.
3-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle
through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to
the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a disc
is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable
audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device”
displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two
sources and not indicate “No Aux Input Device”. If a
front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX
button cycles through all available options, such
as: DVD slot, CD slot, Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary
(if available). See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
earlier in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks”
on page 3-119 for more information.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels, or
any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly, but
the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune in to another channel.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear
seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
Channel Unauth: This channel is blocked or cannot be
received with your XM Subscription package.
3-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel is
no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this
station was one of the presets, choose another station
for that preset button.
XM Theftlocked: The XM™ receiver in your vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM™ receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message is received after
having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM™ Radio 8 digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
3-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System
Navigation/Radio System
When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound
comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers
and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system
volume knob, during a call, to change the volume
level. The adjusted volume level remains in memory for
later calls. To prevent missed calls, a minimum
volume level is used if the volume is turned down too
low.
For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the
separate Navigation System manual.
Bluetooth®
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth
capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The system can be used
while the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up
to 30 ft. (9.1 m). Not all phones support all functions,
and not all phones are guaranteed to work with
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See gm.com/bluetooth
for more information on compatible phones.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the steering wheel to
operate the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See Audio
information.
Voice Recognition
b g (Push To Talk): Press to answer incoming calls,
to confirm system information, and to start speech
recognition.
The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret
voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags.
Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The
system may not recognize voice commands if there is
too much background noise.
c x (Phone On Hook): Press to end a call, reject a
call, or to cancel an operation.
When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system
responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice
command. Wait until the tone and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural
voice.
3-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pairing a Phone
Pairing
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not
connected, calls will be made using OnStar®
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “Pair”. The system responds with instructions
and a four digit PIN number. The PIN number will
be used in Step 4.
Hands-Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar
owner’s guide for more information.
4. Start the Pairing process on the cell phone that will
be paired to the vehicle. Reference the cell phone
manufacturers user guide for information on
this process.
Pairing Information:
• Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system.
• The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is
moving.
Locate the device named “General Motors” in the
list on the cellular phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the four digit PIN
number that was provided in Step 3.
• The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links
with the first available paired cell phone in the
order the phone was paired.
5. The system prompts for a name for the phone. Use
a name that best describes the phone. This name
will be used to indicate which phone is connected.
The system then confirms the name provided.
• Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the
in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time.
• Pairing should only need to be completed once,
unless changes to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is deleted.
6. The system responds with “<Phone name> has
been successfully paired” after the pairing process
is complete.
To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a
Different Phone later in this section.
7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for additional phones to
be paired.
3-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Listing All Paired and Connected Phones
Linking to a Different Phone
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth
devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the
system will say “Is connected” after the connected
phone.
3. Say “Change phone”. The system responds with
“Please wait while I search for other phones”.
• If another phone is found, the response will be
“<Phone name> is now connected”.
Deleting a Paired Phone
• If another phone is not found, the original phone
remains connected.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Storing Name Tags
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
The system can store up to thirty phone numbers as
name tags that are shared between the Bluetooth and
OnStar systems.
3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to
delete followed by a tone.
The system uses the following commands to store and
retrieve phone numbers:
4. Say the name of the phone to be deleted. If the
phone name is unknown, use the “List” command
for a list of all paired phones. The system responds
with “Would you like to delete <phone name>?
Yes or No” followed by a tone
• Store
• Digit Store
• Directory
5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone. The system
responds with “OK, deleting <phone name>”.
3-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
Using the Store Command
The store command allows a phone number to be
stored without entering the digits individually.
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store,
number please” followed by a tone.
3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at
once with no pauses.
Using the Digit Store Command
The digit store command allows a phone number to be
stored by entering the digits individually.
• If the system recognizes the number it responds
with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone
number.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone
number, it responds with “Store” and repeats
the number followed by “Please say yes or no”.
If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the
number is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the number to be re-entered.
2. Say “Digit Store”. The system responds with
“Please say the first digit to store” followed by
a tone.
3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will
repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the number to be
stored is complete.
4. After the system stores the phone number, it
responds with “Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the last
number.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the system
will repeat them.
3-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. After the complete number has been entered, say
“Store”. The system responds with “Please say the
name tag” followed by a tone.
Deleting Name Tags
The system uses the following commands to delete
name tags:
5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name
tag is recorded and the system responds with
“About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”.
• Delete
• Delete all name tags
• If the name tag does not sound correct, say
“No” and repeat Step 5.
Using the Delete Command
The delete command allows specific name tags to be
deleted.
• If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and
the name tag is stored. After the number is
stored the system returns to the main menu.
To use the delete command:
Using the Directory Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
The directory command lists all of the name tags stored
by the system. To use the directory command:
2. Say “Delete”. The system responds with “Delete,
please say the name tag” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system
responds with “Would you like to delete,
<name tag>? Please say yes or no”.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Directory”. The system responds with
“Directory” and then plays back all of the stored
name tags. When the list is complete, the system
returns to the main menu.
• If the name tag is correct, say “Yes” to delete the
name tag. The system responds with “OK,
deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu.”
• If the name tag is incorrect, say “No”. The system
responds with “No. OK, let’s try again, please say
the name tag.”
3-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Delete All Name Tags Command
Using the Dial Command
The delete all name tags command deletes all stored
phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar
(if present).
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dial using
<phone name>. “Number please” followed by
a tone.
To use the delete all name tags command:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
3. Say the entire number without pausing.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• If the system recognizes the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds
with “You are about to delete all name tags stored
in your phone directory and your route destination
directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please
say yes or no.”
• If the system does not recognize the number, it
confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the
number. If the number is not correct, say “No”.
The system will ask for the number to be
re-entered.
• Say “Yes” to delete all name tags.
• Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the
main menu.
Making a Call
Using the Digit Dial Command
Calls can be made using the following commands:
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• Dial
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
• Digit Dial
• Call
2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit
dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit
to dial” followed by a tone.
• Re-dial
3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following
each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
3-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Continue entering digits until the number to be
dialed is complete. After the whole number has
been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with
“OK, Dialing” and dials the number.
• If the system is unsure it recognizes the right
name tag, it confirms the name tag followed
by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”.
The system responds with “OK, calling,
<name tag>” and dials the number. If the name
tag is not correct, say “No”. The system will
ask for the name tag to be re-entered.
• If an unwanted number is recognized by the
system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the
last number.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
• To hear all of the numbers recognized by the
system, say “Verify” at any time and the
system will repeat them.
Using the Re-dial Command
Using the Call Command
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Re-dial”. The system responds
with “Re-dial using <phone name>” and dials the
last number called from the connected Bluetooth
phone.
2. Say “Call”. The system responds with “Call using
<phone name>. Please say the name tag” followed
by a tone.
Once connected, the person called will be heard
through the audio speakers.
3. Say the name tag of the person to call.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, calling, <name tag>” and
dials the number.
3-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving a Call
Three-Way Calling
When an incoming call is received, the audio system
mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Three-Way Calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service
carrier to work.
• Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call.
• Press c x to ignore a call.
1. While on a call press b g . The system responds
with “Ready” followed by a tone.
Call Waiting
2. Say “Three-way call”. The system responds with
“Three-way call, please say dial or call”.
Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone
and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work.
3. Use the dial or call command to dial the number of
the third party to be called.
• Press b g to answer an incoming call when
another call is active. The original call is placed
on hold.
4. Once the call is connected, press b g to link all
the callers together.
• Press b g again to return to the original call.
Ending a Call
• To ignore the incoming call, continue with the
original call with no action.
Press c x to end a call.
• Press c x to disconnect the current call and
switch to the call on hold.
3-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone
Muting a Call
During a call with the audio in the vehicle:
During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be
muted so that the person on the other end of the
call cannot hear them.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
To Mute a call
2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system responds with
“Transferring call” and the audio will switch from
the vehicle to the cell phone.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle
Bluetooth System
2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call
muted”.
The cellular phone must be paired and connected with
the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred.
The connection process can take up to two minutes after
the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY
position.
To Cancel Mute
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system
responds with “Resuming call”.
During a call with the audio on the cell phone,
press b g for more than two seconds. The audio
switches from the cell phone to the vehicle.
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system and the cell phone.
3-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Number During a Call
Voice Pass-Thru
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition
commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone
manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone
supports this feature. This feature can be used to
verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone.
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Dial”. The system responds with “Say a
number to send tones” followed by a tone.
3. Say the number to send.
1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system
• If the system clearly recognizes the number it
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
responds with “Ready” followed by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with
“Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the
number properly, it responds “Dial Number,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
number is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending Number” and the
dial tones are sent and the call continues.
3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK,
accessing <phone name>”.
• The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will
go through its cycle according to the phone’s
operating instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Tones
The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can send numbers and
numbers stored as name tags during a call. This is
used when calling a menu driven phone system.
Account numbers can be programmed into the
phonebook for retrieval during menu driven calls.
3-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call
Other Information
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the
Bluetooth® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and
trade names are those of their respective owners.
1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready”
followed by a tone.
2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with
“Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Say the name tag to send.
• If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
• If the system is not sure it recognized the name
tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>,
Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the
name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system
responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and
the dial tones are sent and the call continues.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Clearing the System
Unless information is deleted out of the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the phonebook
and phone pairing information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the above sections
on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name Tags.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
3-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parental Control
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
System
The RSE system may have a Parental Control feature,
depending on which radio the vehicle has. To enable
Parental Control, press and hold the radio power button
for more than two seconds to stop all system features
such as: radio, video screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD.
While Parental Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system works with the
vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the
front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD
player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two
wireless headphones, and a remote control. See
vehicle’s audio/DVD system.
The radio can be turned back on with a single press of
the power button, but the RSE system will remain
under Parental Control.
To turn Parental Control off, press and hold the radio
power button for more than two seconds. The RSE
returns from where it was previously left and the padlock
icon disappears from the radio display.
Before Driving
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen
while driving and should not try to do so.
Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or
ejecting any disc, pressing the play icon on the
radio DVD display menu, or changing an ignition
position.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the RSE
system might not work until the temperature is within
the operating range. The operating range for the
RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C) or below
140°F (60°C). If the temperature of the vehicle is
outside of this range, heat or cool the vehicle until the
temperature is within the operating range of the
RSE system.
3-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An
indicator light located on the headphones comes
on. If the light comes on but there is intermittent sound
and/or static on the headphones, or if the indicator
light does not come on, the batteries might need to be
replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in this
section for more information. Switch the headphones to
Off when not in use.
Headphones
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut off
automatically to save the battery power if the RSE system
and RSA are shut off or if the headphones are out of
range of the transmitters for more than three minutes. If
you move too far forward or step out of the vehicle, the
headphones lose the audio signal.
The headphones automatically turn off after four hours
of continuous use.
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones
that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the DVD player, while Channel 2 is
dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones are
used to listen to media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s,
DVDAs, radio, any auxiliary source connected to A/V
jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has
this feature. The wireless headphones have an On/Off
button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones must
be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left) appears on
the upper left side, above the ear pad and should be
positioned on the left ear. The symbol R (Right) appears
on the upper right side, above the ear pad and should
be positioned on the right ear.
If the vehicle has a third row video screen display, it has
two additional headphones.
3-120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by the warranty.
Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced
separately from the headphone set. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do the
following:
1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located
on the left side of the headphones. Slide the
battery door open.
The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console,
allow audio or video signals to be connected from
an auxiliary device such as a camcorder or a video
game unit to the RSE system. Adapter connectors
or cables (not included) might be required to connect
the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical home
entertainment system equipment. The yellow jack (A) is
for the video input. The white jack (B) is for the left
audio input. The red jack (C) is for the right audio input.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door
screw.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the radio
system.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can be
heard through the following possible sources:
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video
screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD
player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the
remote control switches the video screen from the
DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device
more information.
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear seat
audio system, if the vehicle has this feature.
The RSE system always transmits the audio signal to
the wireless headphones, if there is audio available. See
“Headphones” earlier in this section for more
information.
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The DVD player is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the RSA system, if the
vehicle has this feature. The DVD player can be
selected as an audio source on the RSA system. See
information.
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language can be
changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any
feature, do the following:
1. Press the z (display menu) button on the remote
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or the
radio’s auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature,
the rear seat passengers are able to hear audio from
the auxiliary device through the wireless or wired
headphones. The front seat passengers are able to
listen to playback from this device through the vehicle
speakers by selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
control.
2. Use the remote control n , q , p , o (navigation)
arrows and the r (enter) button to use the
setup menu.
3. Press the z button again to remove the setup
menu from the screen.
3-122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video Screen
Remote Control
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, do the following:
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the overhead console and press
the desired button. Direct sunlight or very bright light
could affect the ability of the RSE transmitter to receive
signals from the remote control. If the remote control
does not seem to be working, the batteries might need
to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement” later in
this section. Objects blocking the line of sight could also
affect the function of the remote control.
1. Push the release button located on the overhead
console.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and
the DVD continues to play through the previous audio
source. Use the remote control power button or eject the
disc to turn off the screen.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the remote
control power button can be used to turn on the video
screen display and start the disc. The radio can also
page 3-79 for more information.
The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters
for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers
for the remote control. They are located at the rear
of the console.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight can damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by the warranty. Storage
in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD.
Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter
button. This button only operates when using a DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice that
is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust the
brightness, screen display mode (normal, full, or zoom),
and display the language menu.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu. This
button operates only when the display menu or a DVD
menu is active.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen
on and off.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight automatically
turns off after seven to ten seconds if no other button is
pressed while the backlight is on.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, fast
reversing, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a
DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to
pause it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD. This function may vary for
each disc.
3-124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On some radios, play may be slowed down by pressing
the play/pause button then pressing the fast forward
button when the DVD is playing. The DVD continues
playing in a slow play mode. Some radios may perform
reverse slow play by pressing the play/pause button
and then pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel
slow play mode, press the play/pause button.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a DVD
video, press the play/pause button. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release this button. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this feature when the DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary
for each disc.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press
this button again to go to the previous track or
chapter. This button might not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this function
vary for each disc.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go to
the beginning of the next chapter or track. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the system
between the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a DVD video,
press the play button. To stop fast reversing a
DVD audio or CD, release this button. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a DVD is
playing. The format and content of this function vary
for each disc.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides the capability of direct chapter or track
number selection.
3-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after
entering a numeric selection, to clear all numerical
inputs.
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned ON/RUN or in
ACC/ACCESSORY.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press
this button before entering the number.
The picture does not fill the Check the display mode
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
bottom or on both sides or menu button on the remote
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new
universal remote control can be purchased. If this
happens, make sure the universal remote control uses a
code set of Toshiba®.
it looks stretched out.
control.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
Battery Replacement
To change the remote control batteries, do the following:
1. Slide the rear cover back on to the remote control.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
incorrectly.
After stopping the player,
If the stop button was
I push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the DVD
the DVD starts where I left player resumes playing
3. Replace the battery cover.
off and sometimes at the
beginning.
where the DVD was
stopped. If the stop button
was pressed two times
the DVD player begins to
play from the beginning of
the DVD.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
3-126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
The DVD display error message depends on which
radio is in the vehicle. The video screen can display one
of the following:
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Disc Load/Eject Error: Displays when there are disc
load or eject problems.
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
Disc Format Error: Displays if the disc is inserted with
the disc label wrong side up, or if the disc is damaged.
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using a
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Disc Region Error: Displays if the disc is not from
a correct region.
Check that the
No Disc Inserted: Displays if no disc is present when
EJECT or DVD AUX is pressed on the radio.
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
DVD Distortion
I lost the remote and/or
the headphones.
See your dealer/retailer
for assistance.
Video distortion can occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
It might be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
3-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio can be heard through wired headphones (not
included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA. If the
vehicle has this feature, audio can also be heard on
Channel 2 of the wireless headphones.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use
only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
The audio system mutes the rear speakers when the
RSA audio is active through the headphones.
Cleaning the Video Screen
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth
dampened with clean water. Use care when directly
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result.
To listen to an iPod or portable audio device through
the RSA, attach the iPod or portable audio device to the
front auxiliary input (if available), located on the front
audio system. Turn the iPod on, then choose the
front auxiliary input with the RSA SRCE button.
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat passengers
to listen to and control any of the music sources:
radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However,
the rear seat passengers can only control the music
sources the front seat passengers are not listening to,
except on some radios where dual control is allowed.
For example, rear seat passengers can control and
listen to a CD through the headphones, while the driver
listens to the radio through the front speakers. The
rear seat passengers have control of the volume
for each set of headphones.
The RSA functions operate even when the main radio is
off. The front audio system will display the headphone
icon when the RSA is on, and will disappear from
the display when it is off.
P (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on and off.
3-128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the
volume of the wired headphones. The left knob
controls the left wired headphones and the right knob
controls the right wired headphones.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press
either seek arrow to perform a cursor up or down on the
menu. Hold either seek arrow to perform a cursor left
or right on the menu.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the radio FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if the
vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and
rear auxiliary.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station or channel set on the main
radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the radio.
When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the
front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
© ¨(Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM (if
equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the previous
or to the next station or channels and stay there.
This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the radio.
When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer,
press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs
are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios,
if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
Press and hold either seek arrow until the display
flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display
stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed
for more than two seconds. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening
to the radio.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the
PROG button to perform the menu function, Enter.
While listening to a disc, press the left seek arrow to go
to the start of the current track or chapter (if more
than ten seconds have played). Press the right seek
arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc. This
function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat
passengers are listening to the disc.
3-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x c (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous
radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if
a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call, or end
a current call.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of the
vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate
if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle.
b g (Mute/Push to Talk): Press to silence the vehicle
speakers only. Press again to turn the sound on.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
For vehicles with OnStar® or Bluetooth systems press
and hold b g for longer than two seconds to
for more information.
Vehicles with audio
steering wheel controls
could differ depending on
the vehicle’s options.
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
SRCE (Source/Voice Recognition): Press to switch
between the radio (AM, FM, XM), CD, and for vehicles
with, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
For vehicles with the navigation system, press and hold
this button for longer than one second to initiate
voice recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
+ e − e (Volume): Press to increase or to decrease
the radio volume.
w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored
as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing.
3-130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while in
FM Stereo
AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the next track or
chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press
the ¨ if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc
while sourced to a CD player.
FM signals only reach about 10 to 40 miles
(16 to 65 km). Although the radio has a built-in electronic
circuit that automatically works to reduce interference,
some static can occur, especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in and out.
Radio Reception
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power outlet.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception
from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or
hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling
or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or
tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period
of time.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations boost the
power levels during the day, and then reduce these
levels during the night. Static can also occur when things
like storms and power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try reducing the treble on
the radio.
3-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cellular Phone Usage
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the
vehicle’s radio. This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone’s
battery, or simply having the phone on. This interference
causes an increased level of static while listening to
the radio. If static is received while listening to the radio,
unplug the cellular phone and turn it off.
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof of
the vehicle. Keep the antenna clear of obstructions for
clear radio reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged as long as it is securely
attached to the base. If the mast becomes slightly bent,
straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly bent,
replace it.
Occasionally check to make sure the antenna is
tightened to its base. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand. until fully seated plus one quarter turn.
3-132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Defensive Driving
Your Driving, the Road, and
the Vehicle
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for
Driving for Better Fuel Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some
driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible.
{ CAUTION:
• Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly.
• Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops.
• Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time.
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following distance between you
and the driver in front of you.
• When road and weather conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control, if equipped.
• Always follow posted speed limits or drive more
slowly when conditions require.
• Focus on the task of driving.
• Keep vehicle tires properly inflated.
Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in
injury or possible death. These simple defensive
driving techniques could save your life.
• Combine several trips into a single trip.
• Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec
number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size.
• Follow recommended scheduled maintenance.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your
reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision
if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or
ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home
in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the
person had not been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a global tragedy.
The following three systems help to control the vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator.
At times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. Meaning, you can lose control of
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and
attentiveness.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a
mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between
hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a
lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and
allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of
unnecessary braking. That means better braking and
longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes
are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. If
the engine stops, there will still be some power brake
assist but it will be used when the brake is applied. Once
the power assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
vehicle performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force
applied.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to
drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor
or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going
on. This is normal.
ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as
required, faster than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
If there is a problem with
ABS, this warning light
stays on. See Antilock
As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
page 3-37.
Remember: ABS does not change the time needed to get
a foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease stopping
distance. If you get too close to the vehicle in front of you,
there will not be enough time to apply the brakes if that
vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even with ABS.
Along with ABS, the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and
chime will come on each time the ignition is turned on
until the problem is repaired. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work. The brakes might
vibrate or some noise might be heard, but this is normal.
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking in Emergencies
StabiliTrak® System
ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than
even the very best braking.
The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement
system called StabiliTrak. It is an advanced computer
controlled system that assists the driver with directional
control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
Brake Assist
StabiliTrak activates when the computer senses a
discrepancy between the intended path and the direction
the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle’s
brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on
the intended path.
This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to
assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed
in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake control module to
supplement the power brake system under conditions
where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied
the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow
down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic
brake control module increases brake pressure at each
corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor
brake pedal pulsations or pedal movement during this
time is normal and the driver should continue to
apply the brake pedal as the driving situation dictates
The Brake Assist feature will automatically disengage
when the brake pedal is released or brake pedal
pressure is quickly decreased.
When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the
system performs several diagnostic checks to insure
there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt
while it is working. This is normal and does not mean
there is a problem with the vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
If cruise control is being used when StabiliTrak activates,
the cruise control automatically disengages. The
cruise control can be re-engaged when road conditions
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak
light along with one of the following messages will
be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC):
TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE
The StabiliTrak light will
flash on the instrument
panel cluster when
the system is both on and
activated.
STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make
sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned
off using the StabiliTrak on/off button. Then turn the
steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position
to the three o’clock position. If this clears the
message(s), the vehicle does not need servicing. If this
does not clear the message(s), then turn the vehicle
off, wait 15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to
reset the system. If any of these messages still
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), the
vehicle should be taken in for service. For more
information on the DIC messages, see Driver
The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this
is normal.
The traction control disable
button is located on the
instrument panel below the
climate controls.
The traction control part of StabiliTrak can be turned off
by pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if
both systems (traction control and StabiliTrak) were
previously on. To disable both traction control and
StabiliTrak, press and hold the button for five seconds.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by
pressing and releasing the StabiliTrak button if not
automatically shut off for any other reason.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing
engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
When the TCS or StabiliTrak system is turned off, the
StabiliTrak light and the appropriate TCS off or
StabiliTrak off message will be displayed on the DIC to
warn the driver. The vehicle will still have brake-traction
control when traction control is off, but will not be
able to use the engine speed management system. See
“Traction Control Operation” next for more information.
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when the vehicle is started. It will activate and the
StabiliTrak light will flash if it senses that any of the
wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while
driving. If traction control is turned off, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will
work. The engine speed management will be disabled.
In this mode, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This can
cause the brake-traction control to activate constantly.
When the traction control system has been turned
off, system noises may still be heard as a result of the
brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or
snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to
free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the
system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
Notice: If the wheel(s) of one axle is allowed to spin
excessively while the StabiliTrak, ABS and brake
warning lights and any relevant DIC messages
are displayed, the transfer case could be damaged.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Reduce engine power and do not spin the
wheel(s) excessively while these lights and
messages are displayed.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, a reduction
in acceleration may be noticed, or a noise or vibration
may be heard. This is normal.
Steering
Power Steering
If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops
or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
If cruise control is being used when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak light will flash and cruise
control will automatically disengage. Cruise control may
be reengaged when road conditions allow. See
Cruise Control on page 3-11
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires
and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is
banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor that can be controlled.
StabiliTrak may also turn off automatically if it determines
that a problem exists with the system. If the problem does
not clear itself after restarting the vehicle, see your
dealer/retailer for service.
If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering
the curve, while the front wheels are straight.
Locking Rear Axle
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until out of the curve, and then accelerate
gently into the straightaway.
Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction
on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a
standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low,
this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most
traction to move the vehicle.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. These
problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time
because there is no room. That is the time for evasive
action —steering around the problem.
The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
It is better to remove as much speed as possible
from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to the
left or right depending on the space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the
recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, it can be turned
a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass. If
in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your side
of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches,
8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver has
asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your
best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking,
including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires to
slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery until
the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow on
the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down
when you have any doubt.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three
control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not
rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed
or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the
If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then an acceleration
skid is best handled by easing your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Off-Road Driving
Vehicles with four-wheel drive can be used for off-road
driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive and vehicles
with 20-inch tire/wheel assemblies should not be driven
off-road except on a level, solid surface.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
the vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for
a second skid if it occurs.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under a
wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving
speeds, especially on rough terrain.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, slow
down and adjust your driving to these conditions. It is
important to slow down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance will be longer and vehicle control more
limited.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road
and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the
very time you need special alertness and driving skills,
your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could
have a serious — or even fatal — accident if you
drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking.
Before You Go Off-Roading
• Have all necessary maintenance and service
work done.
• Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are
where they should be, and that the spare tire is fully
inflated.
• Be sure to read all the information about
four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual.
Off-roading can be great fun but has some definite
hazards. The greatest of these is the terrain itself. When
off-road driving, traffic lanes are not marked, curves
are not banked, and there are no road signs. Surfaces
can be slippery, rough, uphill, or downhill.
• Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has
them, are properly attached.
• Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where
you will be driving or check with law enforcement
people in the area.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers. Failure to
operate the vehicle correctly off-road could result in loss
of vehicle control or vehicle rollover.
• Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will
be on private land.
Off-roading involves some new skills. That is why it is
very important that you read these driving tips and
suggestions to help make off-road driving safer
and more enjoyable.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
fascia lower air dam. The air dam is held in place by
two bolts and 10 snaps accessible from underneath the
front fascia.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
{ CAUTION:
To remove the air dam:
1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts.
2. With a flat-blade tool, disengage the snaps.
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the
seatbacks can be thrown forward during a
sudden stop. You or your passengers could
be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the
seatbacks.
3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are
disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it
is free.
• Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough terrain.
You or your passengers can be struck by
flying objects. Secure the cargo properly.
• Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or fatally injured if
the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in
the cargo area as far forward and low as
possible.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front fascia lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine.
Always be sure to replace the front fascia air
dam when you are finished off-road driving.
After off-roading, be sure to reinstall the air dam:
1. Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward
to engage the snaps.
2. Install the two outboard bolts.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward
of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward
as you can.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where
permitted), camp stoves, and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
• Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are
not tossed around.
You will find other important information under Loading
Traveling to Remote Areas
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Check to
see if there are any blocked or closed roads.
Environmental Concerns
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle in case something happens to one of them.
For vehicles with a winch, be sure to read the winch
instructions. In a remote area, a winch can be handy if
you get stuck but you will want to know how to use
it properly.
• Always use established trails, roads, and areas that
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving and obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife.
This includes wheel-spinning, breaking down
trees, or unnecessary driving through streams or
over soft ground.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
{ CAUTION:
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-roading requires some new and different skills.
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw you
out of position. This could cause you to lose
control and crash. So, whether you are driving on
or off the road, you and your passengers should
wear safety belts.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes
need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected
obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire
or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands, feet, and body
to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle
is to control the speed. At higher speeds:
• You approach things faster and have less time to
react.
• There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• The vehicle has more bounce when driving over
obstacles.
• More braking distance is needed, especially on an
unpaved surface.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm
grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface
features can jerk the wheel out of your hands.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. Be familiar with the terrain and its many
different features.
When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the
wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even
with one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle
as well or at all.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading surfaces can be
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow,
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the vehicle’s
steering, acceleration, and braking in different ways.
Depending on the surface, slipping, sliding, wheel
spinning, delayed acceleration, poor traction, and longer
braking distances can occur.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns, or sudden braking.
Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from
driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road
signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use good
judgment about what is safe and what is not.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself.
Some things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving on Hills
Approaching a Hill
Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what the vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to
climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard
to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be
a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as
you near the top, but you might not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs.
{ CAUTION:
Consider this as you approach a hill:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle. If
you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive down
them, you cannot control your speed. If you drive
across them, you will roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness, do not drive the hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block your
path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way to
find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs, and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
Driving Uphill
Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill:
• Use headlamps even during the day to make the
vehicle more visible to oncoming traffic.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
speed. Not using more power than needed can
avoid spinning the wheels or sliding.
{ CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can
cause an accident. There could be a drop-off,
embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You
could be seriously injured or killed. As you near
the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert.
{ CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills,
always try to go straight up.
If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot
make it up the hill:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep
it from rolling backwards and apply the parking
brake.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If
the path twists and turns, you might want to find
another route.
• If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in R (Reverse).
• Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to be more visible to
approaching traffic on trails or hills.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide
you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your
transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave
the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side
and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled
downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to Neutral when
you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear.
• If the engine has stopped running, you need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill as straight as possible in
R (Reverse).
• While backing down the hill, put your left hand on the
steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position so you can
tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as
you back down. It is best to back down the hill with
the wheels straight rather than in the left or right
direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
{ CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause
your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in
P (Park). This is because the Neutral position on
the transfer case overrides the transmission. You
or someone else could be injured. If you are going
to leave your vehicle, set the parking brake and
shift the transmission to P (Park). But do not shift
the transfer case to Neutral.
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall,
when going up a hill:
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
N (Neutral) to rev-up the engine and regain forward
momentum. This will not work. The vehicle can roll
backward very quickly and could go out of control.
• Never try to turn around if about to stall when going
up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall the vehicle,
it is steep enough to cause it to roll over. If you
cannot make it up the hill, back straight down the hill.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Downhill
{ CAUTION:
When off-roading takes you downhill, consider:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause
your brakes to overheat and fade. This could
cause loss of control and a serious accident.
Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill
and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under
control.
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with
large rocks?
Things not to do when driving down a hill:
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down might be too steep to drive
across. The vehicle could roll over.
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, try to keep
the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear
so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have
to do all the work. Descend slowly, keeping the
vehicle under control at all times.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes will
have to do all the work and could overheat
and fade.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill,
but if it happens when going downhill:
Driving Across an Incline
An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a
hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the
incline, consider the following:
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the regular brakes and
apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
{ CAUTION:
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt
about the steepness of the incline, do not drive
across it. Find another route instead.
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down
might be too steep to drive across. When going
straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel
base — the distance from the front wheels to
the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when driving across
an incline, the narrower track width — the distance
between the left and right wheels — might not
prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling over.
Driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels which could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Surface conditions can be a problem. Loose
gravel, muddy spots, or even wet grass can cause
the tires to slip sideways, downhill. If the vehicle
slips sideways, it can hit something that will trip
it —a rock, a rut, etc. — and roll over.
Stalling on an Incline
{ CAUTION:
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock
with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels
drop into a rut or depression, the vehicle can
tilt even more.
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle
stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the
vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed.
Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the
vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path.
For these reasons, carefully consider whether to try to
drive across an incline. Just because the trail goes
across the incline does not mean you have to drive it.
The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be
sure you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get
out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you feel the vehicle starting to slide sideways, turn
downhill. This should help straighten out the vehicle and
prevent the side slipping. The best way to prevent
this is to “walk the course” first, so you know what the
surface is like before driving it.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice
{ CAUTION:
When you drive in mud, snow, or sand, the wheels do
not get good traction. Acceleration is not as quick,
turning is more difficult, and braking distances are
longer.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under
the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Your
vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your
passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on
safe surfaces only.
It is best to use a low gear when in mud — the deeper
the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does not get stuck.
When driving on sand, wheel traction changes. On
loosely packed sand, such as on beaches or sand
dunes, the tires will tend to sink into the sand. This
affects steering, accelerating, and braking. Drive
at a reduced speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And, if the vehicle
does get moving, poor steering and difficult braking can
cause it to slide out of control.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on the ignition system and
the vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you get
the tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is under
water, you will never be able to start the engine. When
going through water, remember that when the brakes
get wet, it might take longer to stop. See Driving in Rain
Driving in Water
{ CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be dangerous.
Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream
and you and your passengers could drown. If it is
only shallow water, it can still wash away the
ground from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive
through rushing water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis, or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust
system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling
system for any leakage.
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before driving through it.
Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel
hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get
through. Deep water can damage the axle and other
vehicle parts.
The vehicle requires more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for
additional information.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
Driving at Night
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns or
curves.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But,
as we get older, these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside
rearview mirror.
• Slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles because headlamps can only light up
so much road ahead.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up under
your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the water. This
can happen if the road is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has
little or no contact with the road.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning. The
best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
{ CAUTION:
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not
work as well in a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
After driving through a large puddle of water or a
car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until
the brakes work normally.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
on page 5-55.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
Driving through flowing water could cause your
vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you
and other vehicle occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be very cautious about
trying to drive through flowing water.
• Turn off cruise control.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle instruments
often.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows
Hill and Mountain Roads
clean — inside and outside?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to
recommended pressure?
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a
lower gear.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have
up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
{ CAUTION:
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a
safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so
hot that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
{ CAUTION:
Driving on Snow or Ice
Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the
tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice
can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain
begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid
driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition
off is dangerous. The brakes will have to do all the
work of slowing down and they could get so hot
that they would not work well. You would then
have poor braking or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Always have the engine running
and the vehicle in gear when going downhill.
Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate
gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly
causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under
the tires slick, so there is even less traction.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too
fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
about driving off-road.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ability to accelerate on slippery roads, but slow down
and adjust your driving to the road conditions. When
driving through deep snow, turn off the traction control
part of the StabiliTrak® System to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds.
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay
with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible,
get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe:
vehicle stability during hard stops on a slippery roads,
but apply the brakes sooner than when on dry
pavement.
• Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror.
Allow greater following distance on any slippery road
and watch for slippery spots. Icy patches can occur on
otherwise clear roads in shaded areas. The surface
of a curve or an overpass can remain icy when
the surrounding roads are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while on ice.
{ CAUTION:
Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle.
This may cause exhaust gases to get inside.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
Turn off cruise control, if equipped, on slippery surfaces.
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
• Clear away snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
• Check again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
CAUTION: (Continued)
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run the engine for short periods only as needed to
keep warm, but be careful.
CAUTION: (Continued)
To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as
needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off
and close the window most of the way to save heat.
Repeat this until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to
keep warm also helps.
• Open a window about two inches (5 cm) on
the side of the vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then
when you run the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle
speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps.
Do this as little as possible to save fuel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that circulates the air inside the vehicle and
set the fan speed to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadly CO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside. CO could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the
area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive
vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel High. For vehicles with
StabiliTrak®, turn the traction control part of the
system off. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little
as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release
the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on
the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in
gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking motion that
could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle
out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out.
Recovery hooks can be used, if the vehicle has them. If
the vehicle does need to be towed out, see Towing
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If the vehicle has a traction system, it can often help to
free a stuck vehicle. Refer to the vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the traction system off
and use the rocking method.
{ CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could be
injured. The vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other damage. Spin
the wheels as little as possible and avoid going
above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on the vehicle,
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recovery Hooks
{ CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force.
Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on
the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could
break off and you or others could be injured from
the chain or cable snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would
not be covered by warranty.
Your vehicle has recovery hooks at the front of the
vehicle. You can use them if you are stuck off-road and
need to be pulled to some place where you can
continue driving.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight
your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of
all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how
much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire
and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts
on the vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock post (striker). The
tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
page 5-63.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle. See Towing
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
information on towing a trailer, towing safety
rules and trailering tips.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Example 2
Item
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (136 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
Example 3
Item
Description
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
A
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
1,000 lbs
(453 kg)
B
C
0 lbs (0 kg)
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find
out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the
GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should
spread it out.
{ CAUTION:
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door. The
label shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain
the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This
is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
In the case of a sudden stop or collision,
things carried in the bed of your truck could
shift forward and come into the passenger
area, injuring you and others. If you put
things in the bed of your truck, you should
make sure they are properly secured.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it can change the
way your vehicle handles. These could cause
you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some
of them are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
Your warranty does not cover parts or components
that fail because of overloading.
The label will help you decide how much cargo
and installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to
get added durability might not change your weight
ratings. Ask your dealer to help you load your
vehicle the right way.
There is also important loading information for
off-road driving in this manual. See “Loading Your
Vehicle for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add-On Equipment
Towing
When you carry removable items, you may need
to put a limit on how many people you can
carry inside your vehicle. Be sure to weigh your
vehicle before you buy and install the new
equipment.
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed
with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for
recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
Your vehicle was neither designed nor intended
to carry a slide-in type camper.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Notice: Adding a slide-in camper or similar
equipment to your vehicle can damage it, and
the repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not install a slide-in camper or
similar equipment on your vehicle.
Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing.
Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground. Dolly towing is towing the vehicle
with two wheels on the ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure to read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• What is the distance that will be travelled? Some
vehicles have restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
• Is the proper towing equipment going to be used?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional
for additional advice and equipment
recommendations.
• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as preparing
the vehicle for a long trip, make sure the vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on a
Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{ CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
for the proper procedure to select the Neutral
position for the vehicle.
5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle:
1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow
vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park).
6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the
key — the steering wheel will still turn.
2. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
to take the vehicle out of the Neutral position.
3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with the
rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
Dolly Towing
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off
the Ground)
To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, the vehicle must
be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly. See
“Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in
this section for more information.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Never tow the
vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
{ CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
5. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front:
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
for the proper procedure to select the neutral
position for the vehicle.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly.
3. Shift the transmission to P (Park).
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
8. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle.
9. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 2-48.
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the
Ground)
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
four-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
page 2-48.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following procedure to dolly tow a
two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear:
4. Put the transmission in P (Park).
5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the
manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the
dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly.
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for
towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked
into the straight position.
Level Control
Automatic Level Control
The automatic level control rear suspension is available
on light-duty vehicles and comes as a part of the
Autoride® suspension, if equipped.
{ CAUTION:
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN
and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to
ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned off.
You may hear the air compressor operating when
the height is being adjusted.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case
into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even
if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before the transfer case is
shifted to N (Neutral).
7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting
for the proper procedure to select the neutral
position for the vehicle.
If a weight-distributing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
After towing, see “Shifting Out of Neutral” under
4-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Autoride®
{ CAUTION:
With this feature, improved vehicle ride and handling is
provided under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions.
The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if
the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is
not driven properly. For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. The driver and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle may also be
damaged; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer only
if all the steps in this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with the vehicle.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
Autoride also interacts with the tow/haul mode that,
when activated, will provide additional control of
the shock absorbers. This additional control results in
better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle
is loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
information.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the
vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly,
follow the advice in this section and see your
dealer/retailer for important information about
towing a trailer with the vehicle.
Towing a Trailer
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the
information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears
later in this section.
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration,
braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe
trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used
properly.
• Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission
to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
The following information has many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of these
are important for your safety and that of your passengers.
So please read this section carefully before pulling a
trailer.
• And the weight on the vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Pulling A Trailer
It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed,
altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how
much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. It can depend on any special equipment on
the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle
can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
Here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
the rig will be legal, not only where you live but
also where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches” later
in this section.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Use the following chart to determine how much the
vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and
options.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a trailer
is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do
not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine
and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier
loads.
4-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR *
1500 Series 2WD
5.3L V8 Flex Fuel
5.3L V8 Flex Fuel
3.08
3.42
5,100 lbs (2 313 kg)
5,600 lbs (2 540 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
5.3L V8 Flex Fuel, K5L HD
Cooling Pkg
3.42
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
5.3L V8
5.3L V8
5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.0L V8
3.08
3.42
3.42
3.42
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
8,000 lbs (3 629 kg)
8,100 lbs (3 674 kg)
11,000 lbs (4 990 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
1500 Series 4WD
5.3L LC9 V8
3.42
3.42
3.42
3.42
3.42
5,500 lbs (2 495 kg)
5,400 lbs (2 449 kg)
7,900 lbs (3 583 kg)
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg)
7,700 lbs (3 493g)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
11,500 lbs (5 216 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg)
5.3L LMG V8
5.3L LC9 V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
5.3L LMG V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg
6.0L V8
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not be
exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering information or
advice, or write us at our Customer Assistance
for more information.
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up to a
maximum of 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B), up
to a maximum of 1,000 lbs (454 kg) with a weight
distributing hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that
will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This
will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the
rear axle.
After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the
tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving
some items around in the trailer.
4-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce the
trailering capacity more than the total of the additional
weight.
the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg),
adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit
for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat
passenger and two rear seat passengers with some
luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg)
could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs
(181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now
weighs:
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you might
think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be
subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the
tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect
on the rear axle must still be considered.
Expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of trailer
weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight is
applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle is greater than just the weight itself, as much
as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because the rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg),
900 lbs (408 kg) can be put on the rear axle without
exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is
about 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the
900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves only 600 lbs (272 kg) of
tongue weight that can be handled. Since tongue
weight is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer
weight, expect that the largest trailer the vehicle can
properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
Total Weight on the Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. These numbers can be found on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver door or
see Loading Your Vehicle for more information.
Make sure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle,
or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailer
tongue. If using a weight distributing hitch, make sure
not to go over the rear axle limit before applying
the weight distribution spring bars.
It is important that the vehicle does not exceed any of
its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer
Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure it
is not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
the vehicle and trailer.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why the right hitch is needed.
4-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could
be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is
ample room when turning to avoid contact between the
trailer and the bumper.
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
If the loaded trailer being pulled will weigh more than
5,000 lbs (2 270 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted
weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper
size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle
loading and good handling when driving. Always use a
sway control if the trailer will weigh more than these
limits. Ask a hitch dealer about sway controls.
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the vehicle and the
trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the
trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. If
the trailer being towed weighs up to the vehicle’s trailer
rating limit, safety chains may be attached to the
attaching point on the hitch platform. Always leave just
enough slack so the rig can turn. Never allow safety
chains to drag on the ground.
A: Body to Ground Distance
B: Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” earlier in the
section. Tow/Haul is most useful under the following
driving conditions:
Tow/Haul Mode
Pressing this button at
the end of the shift lever
turns on and off the
tow/haul mode.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haul when lightly loaded
or with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when
the vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
This indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster
comes on when the
tow/haul mode is on.
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode
on page 2-41 for more information.
4-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power output to the trailer brakes is based on the
amount of brake pressure being applied by the vehicle’s
brake system. This available power output to the
trailer brakes can be adjusted to a wide range of
trailering situations.
Trailer Brakes
A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2,000 lbs
(900 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is
adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly.
Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®,
the trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic
system.
The ITBC system is integrated with the vehicle’s brake,
anti-lock brake and StabiliTrak (if equipped) systems.
In trailering conditions that cause the vehicle’s anti-lock
brake or StabiliTrak systems to activate, power sent
to the trailer’s brakes will be automatically adjusted to
minimize trailer wheel lock-up. This does not imply
that the trailer has the StabiliTrak system.
Integrated Trailer Brake Control
System
If the vehicle’s brake, anti-lock brake or StabiliTrak
systems are not functioning properly, the ITBC system
may not be fully functional or may not function at
all. Make sure all of these systems are fully operational
to ensure full functionality of the ITBC system.
The vehicle may have an
Integrated Trailer Brake
Control (ITBC) system for
electric trailer brakes.
This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control
Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake
Control System.
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle’s
electrical system. Turning the ignition off will also turn
off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional
only when the ignition is in ON or in RUN.
CAUTION: (Continued)
controller may be available for use with trailers
with surge, air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer
brake systems. To determine the type of brakes
on the trailer and the availability of controllers,
check with your trailer manufacturer or
dealer/retailer.
The ITBC system can only be used with trailers with
electric brakes.
{ CAUTION:
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBC system may result in reduced or complete
loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase
in stopping distance or trailer instability which
could result in personal injury or damage to the
vehicle, trailer, or other property. An aftermarket
When trailering, make sure of the following:
• The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are
equipped with electric brakes.
• All applicable local and federal laws and regulations
are followed.
• All electrical and mechanical connections to the
trailer are made correctly.
CAUTION: (Continued)
• The trailer’s brakes are in proper working condition.
• The trailer and vehicle are properly loaded for
the towing condition.
The ITBC system is a factory installed item.
Out-of-factory installation of this system should not be
attempted. GM is not responsible for warranty or
performance of the system resulting from out-of-factory
installation.
4-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The ITBC system has a control panel located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering column. See
information on location. The control panel allows
adjustment the amount of output, referred to as trailer
gain, available to the electric trailer brakes and
allows manual application the trailer brakes. The Trailer
Brake Control Panel is used along with the Trailer
Brake Display Page on the DIC to adjust and display
power output to the trailer brakes.
Trailer Brake Control Panel
A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever
B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed by
performing any of the following actions:
Trailer Brake DIC Display Page
The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle’s
Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and
• Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using the
odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information
button (if equipped).
The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting, power
output to the electric trailer brakes, trailer connection and
system operational status.
• Pressing a Trailer Gain button – If the Trailer Brake
Display Page is not currently displayed, pressing a
Trailer Gain button will first recall the current
Trailer Gain setting. After the Trailer Brake Display
Page is displayed, each press and release of
the gain buttons will then cause the Trailer Gain
setting to change.
• Activating the Manual Trailer Brake Apply lever
• Connecting a trailer equipped with electric trailer
brakes
All DIC warning and service messages must first
be acknowledged by the driver by pressing the
odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information
button (if equipped) before the Trailer Brake Display
Page can be displayed and Trailer Gain can be
adjusted.
A. Trailer Gain Setting
B. Power Output to Trailer Brakes
C. No trailer with electric brakes connected or fault
present
4-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRAILER GAIN – This setting is displayed anytime the
Trailer Brake Display Page is active. This setting can be
adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or
disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Gain, press one of the
Trailer Gain adjustment buttons located on the Trailer
Brake Control Panel. Press and hold a gain button to
cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust. To turn the
output to the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain setting to
0.0 (zero).
• There is a fault present in the wiring to the electric
trailer brakes (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed on the DIC).
• There is a fault in the ITBC system (a SERVICE
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message will also
be displayed in the DIC).
Manual Trailer Brake Apply
The Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever is located on the
Trailer Brake Control Panel and is used to apply the
trailer’s electric brakes independent of the vehicle’s
brakes. This lever is used in the Trailer Gain Adjustment
Procedure to properly adjust the power output to the
trailer brakes. Sliding the lever to the left will apply only
the trailer brakes. The power output to the trailer is
indicated in the Trailer Brake Display Page in the DIC. If
the vehicle’s service brakes are applied while using
the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever, the trailer output
power will be the greater of the two.
0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default setting. To properly
adjust trailer gain, see the Trailer Gain Adjustment
Procedure later in this section.
TRAILER OUTPUT – This is displayed any time a trailer
with electric brakes is connected. Output to the electric
brakes is based on the amount of vehicle braking
present and relative to the Trailer Gain setting. Output is
displayed from 0 to 10 bars for each gain setting.
The Trailer Output will indicate “- - - - - -’’ on the Trailer
Brake Display Page whenever the following occur:
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
• No trailer is connected.
• A trailer without electric brakes is connected
(no DIC message is displayed).
• A trailer with electric brakes has become
disconnected (a CHECK TRAILER WIRING
message will also be displayed on the DIC).
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure
• In the Trailer Output display on the DIC, “- - - - - -’’
will disappear if there is no error present.
Connecting a trailer without electric brakes will not
clear the six dashed lines.
Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering
condition and must be adjusted any time vehicle loading,
trailer loading or road surface conditions change.
4. Adjust the Trailer Gain by using the gain adjustment
(+ / -) buttons on the Trailer Brake Control Panel.
Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the best
trailer stopping performance. A trailer that is
5. Drive the vehicle with the trailer attached on a level
road surface representative of the towing condition
and free of traffic at about 20 to 25 mph (32 to
40 km/h) and fully apply the Manual Trailer Brake
Apply lever.
over-gained may result in locked trailer brakes. A trailer
that is under-gained may result in not enough trailer
braking. Both of these conditions may result in poorer
stopping and stability of the vehicle and trailer.
Use the following procedure to correctly adjust Trailer
Gain for each towing condition:
Adjusting trailer gain at speeds lower than 20 to
25 mph (32 to 40 km/h) may result in an incorrect
gain setting.
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper working
condition.
6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just below the point of
trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer wheel
squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks.
2. Connect a properly loaded trailer to the vehicle and
make all necessary mechanical and electrical
for more information.
Trailer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing
a heavily loaded trailer. In this case, adjust the
Trailer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the
towing condition.
3. After the electrical connection is made to a trailer
equipped with electric brakes:
• A TRAILER CONNECTED message will be
briefly displayed on the DIC display.
7. Re-adjust Trailer Gain any time vehicle loading,
trailer loading or road surface conditions change
or if trailer wheel lock-up is noticed at any time while
towing
• The Trailer Brake Display Page will appear on
the DIC showing TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER
OUTPUT.
4-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. There is an electrical fault in the wiring to the
electric trailer brakes. This message will continue as
long as there is an electrical fault in the trailer
wiring. This message will also turn off if the driver
acknowledges this message off.
Other ITBC Related DIC Messages
In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER
OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer connection and
ITBC system status is displayed in the DIC.
TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will be briefly
displayed when a trailer with electric brakes is first
connected to the vehicle. This message will automatically
turn off in about ten seconds. The driver can also
acknowledge this message before it automatically
turns off.
To determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle side
or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the
vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will be
displayed if:
3. Wait ten seconds, then turn the ignition back to RUN.
1. The ITBC system first determines connection to a
trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer
harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle.
4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message
re-appears, the electrical fault is on the vehicle side.
If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only
re-appears when connecting the trailer wiring
harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on the
trailer side.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is
stationary, this message will automatically turn off in
about thirty seconds. This message will also turn
off if the driver acknowledges this message off or if
the trailer harness is re-connected.
SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – This message
will be displayed when there is a problem with the
ITBC system. If this message persists over multiple
ignition cycles there is problem with the ITBC system.
Take the vehicle to an authorized GM dealer to have the
ITBC system diagnosed and repaired.
If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving,
this message will continue until the ignition is
turned off. This message will also turn off if the
driver acknowledges this message off or if the trailer
harness is re-connected.
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE
TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message is displayed while
driving the vehicle, power is no longer available to
the trailer brakes. When traffic conditions allow, carefully
pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn
the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer
and turn the ignition back on. If either of these
messages continues, either the vehicle or trailer needs
service.
Driving with a Trailer
{ CAUTION:
When towing a trailer, exhaust gases may collect
at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate,
trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open.
An authorized GM dealer may be able to diagnose
and repair problems with the trailer. However, any
diagnosis and repair of the trailer is not covered under
the vehicle warranty. Please contact your trailer
dealer for assistance with trailer repairs and trailer
warranty information.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
To maximize safety when towing a trailer:
• Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks
and make necessary repairs before starting a
trip.
• Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or
rear-most window open.
• Fully open the air outlets on or under the
instrument panel.
• Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting
that brings in only outside air and set the fan
speed to the highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
For more information about carbon monoxide, see
4-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Get to know the rig before setting out for the open
road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself.
Passing
More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer.
Because the rig is longer, it is necessary to go much
farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to
the lane.
Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This checks the electrical
connection at the same time.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
During the trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
are still working.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer. This
can help to avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
When turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so the trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on steep uphill grades, the vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let
the engine run while parked, preferably on level ground,
with the automatic transmission in P (Park) for a
few minutes before turning the engine off. If the overheat
page 5-30.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever
signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the
trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle
is turning, changing lanes or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument
panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may think other
drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
Parking on Hills
{ CAUTION:
Driving On Grades
Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer
attached can be dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be
injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a
flat surface.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting
down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is
not shifted down, the brakes might have to be used so
much that they would get hot and no longer work well.
Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to
a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under
heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.
If parking the rig on a hill:
The tow/haul mode may be used if the transmission
shifts too often. See Tow/Haul Mode earlier in this
section.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park)
yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is
turned off immediately after towing at high altitude
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
4-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you:
• Start the engine
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking
brake and shift into P (Park).
• Shift into a gear
5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
6. Release the brake pedal.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
{ CAUTION:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a
trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule
or Index for more information. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system
and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect
these before and during the trip.
If the engine has been left running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure the vehicle will not move, even when on
fairly level ground, use the steps that follow.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Always put the shift lever fully in P (Park) with the
parking brake firmly set.
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer
circuits:
Trailer Wiring Harness
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness
Package
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed*
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the
underhood electrical center, but the wires are not
connected. They should be connected by your
dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal
heavy-duty trailer connector is attached to the rear
bumper beam. It is located next to the integrated trailer
hitch.
If charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery, press the
Tow/Haul mode button, if equipped, located at the end
of the shift lever. This will boost the vehicle system
voltage and properly charge the battery. If the trailer is
too light for Tow/Haul mode, or the vehicle is not
equipped with Tow/Haul, turn on the headlamps as a
second way to boost the vehicle system and charge the
battery.
4-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electric Brake Control Wiring
Provisions
Trailer Recommendations
Subtract the hitch loads from the Cargo Weight Rating
(CWR). CWR is the maximum weight of the load
the vehicle can carry. It does not include the weight of
the people inside, but you can figure about 150 lbs.
(68 kg) for each passenger. The total cargo load must
not be more than the vehicles CWR.
These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as
part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions
are for an electric brake controller. The instrument panel
contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector
for the trailer brake controller. The harness contains the
following wires:
Weigh the vehicle with the trailer attached, so the
GVWR or GAWR are not exceeded. If using a
weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without the
spring bars in place.
• Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector
• Red/Black: Battery
• Light Blue/White: Brake Switch
• White: Ground
The best performance is obtained by correctly spreading
out the weight of the load and choosing the correct
hitch and trailer brakes.
It should be installed by your dealer/retailer or a
qualified service center.
If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt cuts
exist, but are not connected further in the harness. If an
aftermarket trailer brake controller is installed, the
ITBC must be disconnected. Do not power both ITBC
and aftermarket controllers to control the trailer brakes at
the same time.
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and
supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Damage to vehicle components resulting from the
installation or use of non-GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, are not covered under the
terms of the vehicle warranty and may affect remaining
warranty coverage for affected parts.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on the vehicle. Your
GM dealer/retailer can accessorize the vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you will
know that GM-trained and supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{ CAUTION:
You can be injured and the vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts, and
tools before attempting any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts, and
other fasteners. English and metric fasteners
can be easily confused. If the wrong fasteners
are used, parts can later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be
necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If doing some of your own service work, use the proper
service manual. It tells you much more about how to
service the vehicle than this manual can. To order
the proper service manual, see Service Publications
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle
performance, we recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.
This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work performed. See
If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 0) or
the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code 3), you can use
either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see
engines, use only regular unleaded gasoline.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the Vehicle
Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can
affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment
to the outside of the vehicle.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Octane
California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, the
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
might be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
could turn on and the vehicle might fail a smog-check
If this occurs, return to your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is
caused by the type of fuel used, repairs might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or
3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an
octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available
in your area. We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not
be used in vehicles that were not designed for those
fuels.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In
most cases, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. To help
keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if the
vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or
valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel System
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel tank at every engine
oil change, can help clean deposits from fuel injectors
and intake valves. GM Fuel System Treatment PLUS is
the only gasoline additive recommended by General
Motors.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend against
the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can
reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance of the
emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification
D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85
will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%.
Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet
ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could
cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
The 8th digit of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies the
vehicle’s engine. The VIN is at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not
properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank
can improve starting. For good starting and heater
efficiency below 32°F (0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank
should contain no more than 70% ethanol. It is best
not to alternate repeatedly between gasoline and E85. If
you do switch fuels, it is recommended that you add
as much fuel as possible — do not add less than three
gallons (11 L) when refueling. You should drive the
vehicle immediately after refueling for at least
If the vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0) or the
5.3L V8 engine (Code 3), you can use either regular
unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to
other engines, use only the unleaded gasoline described
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 0) or
the 5.3L V8 engine (Code 3) can use 85% ethanol
fuel (E85). We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that
are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a
“renewable” fuel, meaning it is made from renewable
sources such as corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(www.eere.energy.gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator.html)
that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that
do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol
content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content
is greater than 85%.
seven miles (11 km) to allow the vehicle to adapt to
the change in ethanol concentration.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so
you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when
using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle’s fuel system.
Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused
by additives would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions on
the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver side of the vehicle. If the vehicle has
E85 fuel capability, the fuel cap will be yellow and
state that E85 or gasoline can be used. See Fuel E85
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the
last turn as you loosen it.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-58 for more information.
{ CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap
too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something
ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray
can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more
likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and
wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the
cap all the way.
{ CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the station
attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit
properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and
emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-39.
When replacing the fuel cap, insert the tether in its hole
before tightening the cap. Turn the fuel cap clockwise
until it clicks. It will require more effort to turn the
fuel cap on the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the
cap is fully installed. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
page 3-39.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the
vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel vapor. You can be
badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into approved containers.
An electric fan under the hood can start up and
injure you even when the engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or on
any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside
of the fill opening before operating the nozzle.
Contact should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
{ CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and
start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil,
coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could
be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things
that will burn onto a hot engine.
5-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood:
1. Pull the handle with this
symbol on it. It is
located inside the
vehicle to the lower left
of the steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the
secondary hood release, near the center of the
grille.
3. Push the secondary hood release to the right.
4. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then bring the hood from full open
to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed
position, pause, then push the front center of the
hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
page 5-40.
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the
Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid
on page 5-21.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
G. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (Out of View). See
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
page 5-24.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
M. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the location of the
When to Add Engine Oil
engine oil fill cap.
I
t
recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil
to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see
Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper
operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in
when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils meeting these
Look for three things:
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on
the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil
has been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Cold Temperature Operation
• GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
If in an area of extreme cold, where the temperature
falls below −20°F (−29°C), use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 engine oil. Both provide
easier cold starting for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. Always use an oil that meets the required
specification, GM6094M. See “What Kind of Engine
Oil to Use” for more information.
• SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers
on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness.
Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change the oil as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life system might not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, the engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must
be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service people
who will perform this work using genuine parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check the oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil
Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and
could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since the last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when
to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably.
For the oil life system to work properly, the system
must be reset every time the oil is changed.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to
a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message coming on,
reset the system.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it indicates that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine
Oil Life System:
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle it by taking it to a
place that collects used oil.
1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If
the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle
must be in P (Park) to access this display. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC,
or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does
not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds.
The oil life will change to 100%.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each
engine oil change.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes
back on when the vehicle is started, the Engine Oil Life
System has not reset. Repeat the procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1
through 6. When the engine air cleaner/filter is removed,
lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the
engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
1. Locate the air
cleaner/filter assembly.
See Engine
on page 5-14.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
2. Loosen the four screws on the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty.
Always use the automatic transmission fluid listed
page 6-13.
{ CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off
can cause you or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop
flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful working on the
engine with the air cleaner/filter off.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in the
page 6-4. Be sure to use the transmission fluid listed
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you
check your transmission fluid.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is usually not necessary to check the transmission
fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a
transmission leak or overheating the transmission. If
you suspect a small leak, then use the following
checking procedures to check the fluid level. However,
if there is a large leak, then it may be necessary to
have the vehicle towed to a dealer/retailer service
department and have it repaired before driving the
vehicle further.
Before checking the fluid level, prepare the vehicle as
follows:
1. Start the engine and park the vehicle on a level
surface. Keep the engine running.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in
P (Park).
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, move the
shift lever back to P (Park).
Use this cold check procedure to check fluid level when
the transmission temperature is between 80°F and
90°F (27°C and 32°C).
1. Locate the transmission
dipstick at the rear of
the engine
4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least
one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal.
5. Keep the engine running and press the Trip/Fuel
button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS
TEMP (Transmission Temperature) displays on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
compartment, on the
passenger side of
the vehicle.
6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and
perform the appropriate check procedure. If the
TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required
temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool,
or operate the vehicle until the appropriate
transmission fluid temperature is reached.
for more information.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
Cold Check Procedure
Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if
the transmission has enough fluid to be operated
safely until a hot check procedure can be made. The
hot check procedure is the most accurate method
to check the fluid level. Perform the hot check procedure
at the first opportunity.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hot Check Procedure
Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level
when the transmission fluid temperature is between
160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C).
The hot check is the most accurate method to check the
fluid level. The hot check should be performed at the
first opportunity in order to verify the cold check.
The fluid level rises as fluid temperature increases, so it
is important to ensure the transmission temperature
is within range.
1. Locate the transmission
dipstick at the rear of
the engine
5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band,
add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the
level into the COLD band. It does not take
much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do
not overfill.
compartment, on the
passenger side of
the vehicle.
6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity
after the transmission reaches a normal operating
temperature between 160°F to 200°F
(71°C to 93°C).
for more information.
7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
2. Flip the handle up, and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way,
wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower
level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the
reading.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level. If
readings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer/retailer.
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the
correct working temperature.
5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch
band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within
the HOT band, and the transmission temperature is
between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add
or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the
HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only
enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It
does not take much fluid, generally less than one
pint (0.5L). Do not overfill.
6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5.3L Engine shown, 6.0L Engine similar
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan(s)
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® can
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first.
{ CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts,
can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you
can be burned.
The following explains the cooling system and how to
check and add coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating, see Engine
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get
any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else
needs to be added. This mixture:
What to Use
• Gives freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C),
{ CAUTION:
outside temperature.
• Gives boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C),
engine temperature.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system can
be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid
such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant
mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system
is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
• Protects against rust and corrosion.
• Will not damage aluminum parts.
• Helps keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the
engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core,
and other parts.
Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used
in the vehicle’s cooling system, the vehicle could
be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in this manual for the
cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the
coolant level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL
COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See
more information on location.
The coolant level should be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not, you may have a leak in the
cooling system.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn the surge tank
pressure cap — even a little — they can come out
at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the surge tank pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and surge
tank pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and
it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do
not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause the engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
{ CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine is not running and
can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as
follows:
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the
cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for
that to stop. A hiss means there is still some
pressure left.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture
to the FULL COLD mark.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure
cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the
coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill
procedure Steps 1 through 6.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine
overheating.
There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s
instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE
POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning
appears, but instead get service help right away.
If Steam Is Coming From The Engine
Compartment
If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle
is parked on a level surface.
{ CAUTION:
Then check to see if the engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating, both fans should
be running. If they are not, do not continue to run
the engine and have the vehicle serviced.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until
there is no sign of steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
page 5-33 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it
overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
Notice: If the engine catches fire while driving with
no coolant, the vehicle can be badly damaged.
The costly repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. See Overheated Engine
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
safe place in an emergency.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in N (Neutral)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or N (Neutral) and let
the engine idle.
If No Steam Is Coming From The
Engine Compartment
The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or the
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message, along
with a low coolant condition, can indicate a serious
problem.
If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the
overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive
the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the
warning does not come back on, continue to drive
normally.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the
vehicle right away.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
If you get the ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE or
the ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE message
with no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
If the overheat warning is displayed with no sign of
steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest temperature and
to the highest fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Engine Fan Noise
The vehicle has electric cooling fans. You might hear
the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday
driving. The fans can turn off if no cooling is required.
Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or
high outside temperatures, or if you are operating the
air conditioning system, the fans can change to
high speed and you might hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and indicates that the cooling system
is functioning properly. The fans change to low speed
when additional cooling is no longer required.
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this
mode, you will notice a loss in power and engine
performance. This operating mode allows the vehicle to
be driven to a safe place in an emergency. Driving
extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil and
page 5-15.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid:
reservoir location.
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level on
the dipstick.
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark. If
necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level up to
the mark.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the
vehicle and the damages may not be covered by
the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid
listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be
sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use.
Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against
freezing in an area where the temperature may fall
below freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC
that comes on when the washer fluid is low. The
message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of
each ignition cycle. When the WASHER FLUID LOW
ADD FLUID message displays, you will need to
add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-14 for reservoir
location.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not
correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings
are worn, there will be too much fluid when new brake
linings are installed. Add or remove brake fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the
{ CAUTION:
reservoir.
If too much brake fluid is added, it can spill on the
engine and burn, if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and the vehicle could
be damaged. Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake hydraulic system. See
“Checking Brake Fluid” in this section.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down:
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
• The brake fluid level goes down because of normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are installed,
the fluid level goes back up.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check the brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
• A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also
cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic
system fixed, since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not work well.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Brake Fluid
{ CAUTION:
Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir.
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic
system, the brakes might not work well. This could
cause a crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
The fluid level should be
above MIN. If it is not,
have the brake hydraulic
system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on the vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
Use only new DOT-3 brake fluid from a sealed container.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to torque specifications in
Brake Wear
This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying
the brake pedal firmly.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
{ CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an
accident. When the brake wear warning sound is
heard, have the vehicle serviced.
Brake Adjustment
Every brake stop, the disc brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
the brakes.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Vehicle Storage
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. The vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When parts of the braking system are replaced — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and new
ones are installed — be sure to get new approved
replacement parts. If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for the vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for the
worse. The braking performance expected can change in
many other ways if the wrong replacement brake parts
are installed.
{ CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that
can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not
on working around a battery without getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: If the vehicle is driven infrequently,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery.
This helps keep the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of the vehicle,
remove the black, negative (−) cable from the battery or
use a battery trickle charger. This helps maintain the
charge of the battery over an extended period of time.
Battery
This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for
one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to the vehicle that would not be covered
by the warranty.
Jump Starting
If the vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you
may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following
steps to do it safely.
Trying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage the vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
{ CAUTION:
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a manual transmission
in Neutral before setting the parking brake. If
you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear, not in Neutral.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the
warranty. Always turn off the radio and other
accessories when jump starting the vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the
radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This
avoids sparks and helps save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
If the vehicle has a remote positive (+) terminal, it is
located under a red plastic cover at the positive
battery post. To uncover the remote positive (+)
terminal, open the red plastic cover.
The remote negative (-) terminal is a stud located on
the right front of the engine, where the negative
battery cable attaches.
for more information on the location of the
remote positive (+) and remote negative (-)
terminals.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{ CAUTION:
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not
need to add water to the battery installed in your
new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be
sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do not,
explosive gas could be present.
An electric fan can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do
not get it on you. If you accidentally get it in your
eyes or on your skin, flush the place with water
and get medical help immediately.
{ CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if
you need more light.
{ CAUTION:
CAUTION: (Continued)
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engine is running.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the remote negative (−) terminal, on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with the
dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
vehicle has one.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover, if the
vehicle has one, to its original position.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain
level. When checking the fluid level on any axle,
variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill
differences between the minimum and the maximum
fluid volume. Also, if a vehicle has just been driven
before checking the fluid level, it may appear lower than
normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle
tubes and has not drained back to the sump area.
Therefore, a reading taken five minutes after the vehicle
has been driven will appear to have a lower fluid
level than a vehicle that has been stationary for an hour
or two. Remember that the rear axle assembly must
be supported to get a true reading.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
• For 5.3L engines, the proper level is from 0.04 inch
to 0.75 inch (1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom
of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
• For 6.0L engines, the proper level is from 0.6 inch
to 1.6 inches (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom
of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
Active Transfer Case
A. Fill Plug
B. Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the fill plug hole, you
will need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the fill plug hole. Use
care not to overtighten the plug.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
Front Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
A: Fill Plug
B: Drain Plug
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle should:
What to Use
• Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from
a light colored wall.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
• Have all four tires on a level surface which is level
all the way to the wall.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at
the factory and should need no further adjustment.
• Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall.
• Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it.
• Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while
headlamp aiming is being performed.
However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim
of the headlamps can be affected and adjustment
can be necessary.
• Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one
person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat.
• Have tires properly inflated.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
can mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs
to be adjusted.
• Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the
vehicle.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be
adjusted. It is possible however, to re-aim the
headlamps as described.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
To adjust the vertical aim:
for more information.
4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat
surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted
to be seen on the flat surface.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot
on the low-beam headlamp.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the
incorrect headlamp aim.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8
Torx® socket.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,
Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
A. Stoplamp/Turn
Signal/Taillamp
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Turn
Signal/Taillamp
Halogen Bulbs
D. Sidemarker Lamp
{ CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions on the bulb package.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
4. Press the release tab, if the bulb socket has one,
and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to
remove it from the taillamp assembly.
more information.
5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket.
2. Remove the two
screws from the
6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert the
bulb socket into the taillamp assembly. Turn the
bulb socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly
until it clicks.
taillamp assembly.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly making sure to line
up the pins with the vehicle.
3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you
disengage the outer pins on the taillamp assembly
from the vehicle.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
License Plate Lamp
Replacement Bulbs
To replace one of these bulbs:
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
7441
1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket.
License Plate Lamp
168
Rear Turn Signal Lamp, Taillamp,
and Stoplamp
Sidemarker Lamp
3057
194
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb socket out of the connector.
3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keeping the
bulb straight as you pull it out.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb
socket.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To replace the wiper
blade assembly, do the following:
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from
the windshield.
3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and
make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the
locked position.
For the proper type and size, see Maintenance
2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the
blade, and rotate the blade assembly away from
the arm connector.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details. For additional information refer
to the tire manufacturer.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting
accident could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when your vehicle’s
tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the recommended
pressure.
{ CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an air-out
and a serious accident. See Loading the
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if your
vehicle’s tires have been damaged,
replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
20-Inch Tires
If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch P275/55R20
size tires, they are classified as touring tires and are
designed for on road use. The low-profile, wide
tread design is not recommended for off-road
additional information.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples
of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
page 5-74.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the “Tire Size”
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one
side may have the date of manufacture.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used in a dual
configuration. For information on recommended
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load
that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load when used as a
single. For information on recommended
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United
States version of a metric tire sizing system. The
letters LT as the first two characters in the tire
size means a light truck tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim
Association.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
75 percent as high as it is wide.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-63.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
page 4-34.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 5-70.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
When to Check
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Check your tires once a month or more.
Do not forget to check the pressure of the spare
information.
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when they are
underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The
TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates on
a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When
the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for
a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
for additional information.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver
when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors
are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,
excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires
and transmits the tire pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool
weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your
vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for
your vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading the
Loading Information label and its location on your
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the
low tire pressure warning
light located on the
instrument panel cluster.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can warn you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal
At the same time a message to check the pressure in a
specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light
and the DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation
pressure. Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can
be viewed by the driver. For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and displays see
Notice: Liquid tire sealants could damage the Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors. Sensor
damage caused by using a tire sealant is not
covered by your warranty. Do not use liquid tire
sealants.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the
TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for
the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning
message is also displayed. The low tire warning light
and DIC warning message come on at each ignition
cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the
conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC
message to come on are:
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels.
Tires and wheels other than those recommended
for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from
page 5-71.
• One of the road tires has been replaced with the
spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC
message should go off once you re-install the road
tire containing the TPMS sensor.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started
but not completed or not completed successfully
after rotating the vehicle’s tires. The DIC message
and TPMS malfunction light should go off once
the TPMS sensor matching process is performed
successfully. See “TPMS Sensor Matching Process”
later in this section.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter’s
lock and unlock buttons at the same time for
approximately five seconds. The horn sounds
twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall.
4. Start with the driver side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and wheel position.
To decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air pressure
gage, or a key.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to
match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes
to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching
process stops and you need to start over.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active.
The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of
wear or damage. See When It Is Time for New
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
page 4-34.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This
will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform
most like it did when the tires were new.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions,
influence when you need new tires.
{ CAUTION:
One way to tell when it is
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which appear
when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
Some commercial
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a
cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure
to use a scraper or wire brush later, if
needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See
truck tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it
moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and tire
pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS for
for additional information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear out
before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get older,
consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help
keep your vehicle performing most like it did when the
tires were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can
affect the braking and handling performance of your
for information on proper tire rotation.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your vehicle may have a different size spare than
the road tires (those originally installed on your
vehicle). When new, your vehicle included a spare
tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall
diameter as your vehicle’s road tires and wheels,
so it is all right to drive on it. Because this spare
was developed for use on your vehicle, it will not
affect vehicle handling.
{ CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes, brands,
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle
might not handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes, brands, or
types could also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size, brand, and type
tires on all wheels.
{ CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use
only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the
vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they
are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your
vehicle’s original tires.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this could
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and
resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover
airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level you
would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
{ CAUTION:
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the
Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading
the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location
on your vehicle.
If you add different sized wheels, your vehicle may
not provide an acceptable level of performance
and safety if tires not recommended for those
wheels are selected. You may increase the
chance that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use GM specific wheel and tire
systems developed for your vehicle, and have
them properly installed by a GM certified
technician.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times
as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Temperature – A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
{ WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
{ WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced. See your dealer/retailer
for proper diagnosis.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS
sensors for your vehicle.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It
could affect the braking and handling of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts for
replacement.
Putting a used wheel on the vehicle is dangerous.
You cannot know how it has been used or how far
it has been driven. It could fail suddenly and
cause a crash. If you have to replace a wheel, use
a new GM original equipment wheel.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
information.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If your vehicle has P265/70R17 size tires,
use tire chains only where legal and only when you
must. Use chains that are the proper size for your
vehicle’s tires. Install them on the rear tires only.
Tire Chains
{ CAUTION:
Do not use chains on the front tires.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20
size tires, do not use tire chains. They can
damage your vehicle because there is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without
the proper amount of clearance can cause
damage to the brakes, suspension, or other
vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire
chains could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and you or others may be injured in a
crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive
slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your
vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit, install
them on the rear tires.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{ CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and training. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for anything else,
you or others could be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, only use it for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls
the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6.
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in Neutral.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
{ CAUTION:
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or
other people. You and they could be badly injured
or even killed. Find a level place to change your
tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of
the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in P (Park).
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks (A).
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The jack and the wheel blocks are located under a
cover near the passenger side rear seat.
Rear Seat (Passenger Side) Jack Cover
1. Remove the jack cover by turning the two wing nuts
one-quarter turn counterclockwise and pulling the
jack cover off.
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains how to use the jack
and change a tire.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the wheel blocks (A) attached to the
jack (E) by turning the wing nut (C)
counterclockwise. Place the wheel blocks where
needed as indicated in previously in this section.
The tools for changing a flat tire are located in the
passenger’s side top-box storage unit.
To remove the tools, do the following:
1. Open the top door on the passenger’s side top-box
storage unit. Use the ignition/door key to unlock it if
for more information.
2. Remove the black pouch from the storage box.
You now have all of the tools you will need to
lower the spare tire and change a flat.
A. Wheel Blocks
B. Jack Knob
C. Wing Nut
D. Retaining Hook
E. Jack
F. Mounting Bracket
2. Release the jack (E) from the mounting bracket (F)
by turning the jack knob (B) on the jack
counterclockwise to release the jack from the
mounting bracket.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the spare tire:
1. Open the hoist shaft access cover on the bumper to
access the spare tire lock (J).
2. To remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition
key, turn it clockwise and pull it straight out.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (I) and
wheel wrench (H) as shown.
A. Spare Tire
(Valve Stem
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extension(s)
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire/Wheel
Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
J. Spare Tire Lock
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Insert the open end of
the extension (F)
6. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you to
pull the hoist cable
towards you, to assist
in reaching the
through the hole in the
rear bumper (G) (hoist
shaft access hole).
spare tire.
Be sure the hoist end (F) of the extension connects
to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of
the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench.
5. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the
wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire
page 5-92 for more information.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Tilt the tire with slack in the cable to access the
tire/wheel retainer (D). Separate the retainer from
the guide pin by sliding the retainer up the pin
while pressing down on the latch. When the
retainer is separated from the guide pin, tilt the
retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel
along with the cable and guide pin.
8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the vehicle has a
center cap, place the
chiseled end of
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
the wheel wrench in
the slot on the
wheel and gently pry
the cap out.
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
If the vehicle has a bolt-on hub cap, loosen the
plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. The plastic nut caps will be
retained in the hub cap after it is removed from the
wheel.
The tools needed are the jack (A), the wheel blocks (B),
the jack handle (C), the jack handle extensions (D),
and the wheel wrench (E).
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Use the wheel
wrench to loosen
{ CAUTION:
all the wheel nuts. Turn
the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to
loosen the wheel nuts.
Do not remove the
wheel nuts yet.
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
{ CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal injury
and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location before raising the
vehicle.
4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Position
Rear Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and
only one jack handle extension. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack handle extension. Attach the jack
handle to the jack (A). Position the jack on the
frame behind the flat tire near the front body mount
as shown. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to
raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough room for the
spare tire to clear the ground.
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the
vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and
both jack handle extensions. Attach the wheel
wrench to the jack handle extensions. Attach the
jack handle to the jack. Use the jacking pad
provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel wrench
clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far
enough off the ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to clear the ground.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove all the
wheel nuts.
{ CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it
is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come off and cause
an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the
page 5-80.
6. Take off the flat tire.
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces, and
spare wheel.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Install the spare tire.
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
Incorrect or improperly tightened wheel nuts can
cause the wheel to come loose and even come
off. This could lead to a crash. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new original
equipment wheel nuts. Stop somewhere as soon
as you can and have the nuts tightened with a
torque wrench to the proper torque specification.
for wheel nut torque specification.
Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because
the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end
of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the
spare tire.
10. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the wheel nuts until the
wheel is held against the hub.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
11. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Tighten the nuts firmly
in a crisscross
When you reinstall the full-size wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the either the center cap or the bolt-on
hub cap, depending on what your vehicle has.
sequence as shown by
turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
• If you are reinstalling a center cap, line up the tab
on the center cap with the slot on the wheel. The
cap only goes in one way. Place the cap on
the wheel and press until it snaps into place.
• If you are reinstalling bolt-on hub caps, line
up the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts
and tighten them clockwise by hand to get them
started. Continue tightening with the wheel wrench
until snug.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch:
Secondary Latch System
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible. If
the cable is not visible
proceed to Step 6.
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,
the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
page 5-95.
{ CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly and
you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the
instructions listed next.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
page 5-81.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with
the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom edge
of the jack (A) on the
wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the rear
bumper.
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the
spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by
the cable.
{ CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the procedure
could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does
not slide off the jack completely, make sure no
one is behind you or on either side of you as you
pull the jack out from under the spare.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and
Tools
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist end of extension, and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
the rest of the way.
{ CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
14. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been inspected
and/or replaced.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up can damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier.
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Put the tire (A) on the ground at the rear of the
vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to
the rear.
A. Spare Tire/Flat Tire F. Hoist End of
(Valve Stem
Pointed Down)
B. Hoist Assembly
C. Hoist Cable
D. Tire/Wheel
Retainer
Extension Tool
G. Hoist Shaft
Access Hole
H. Wheel Wrench
I. Jack Handle
Extension(s)
E. Hoist Shaft
J. Spare Tire Lock
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Tilt the tire. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (D)
from the guide pin. Pull the pin through the
center of the wheel. Tilt the retainer down through
the center wheel opening.
3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (I) and
wheel wrench (H) as shown.
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Insert the open end of
the extension (F)
through the hole in the
rear bumper (G) (hoist
shaft access hole).
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is fully seated across the underside of
the wheel and is centered in the wheel opening.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You
cannot overtighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock.
9. Close the hoist shaft access cover.
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store the tools, follow these steps:
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire than
the road tires originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,
so it is all right to drive on it. If your vehicle has
four-wheel drive and the different size spare tire is
installed, keep the vehicle in two-wheel drive.
1. Return the tools to the tool bag and place it back in
the top-box storage unit.
2. Assemble the wheel blocks and jack together with
the wing nut by reversing Step 2 under Removing
the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-81
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, the spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
3. Replace the jack cover and tighten the jack-cover
wing nuts.
Spare Tire
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
together. If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not
match your vehicle’s original road tires and wheels
in size and type, do not include the spare in the
tire rotation.
Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can
have your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You
could damage the vehicle, and the repair costs
would not be covered by your warranty. Never use
four-wheel drive when the different size spare
tire is installed on the vehicle.
5-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
The vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and
dirt can accumulate on the upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the
upholstery. It is important to keep the upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be
removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause
stains to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in the vehicle’s breathing space. Before
using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the vehicle’s interior,
maintain adequate ventilation by opening the vehicle’s
doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Products that remove odors from the vehicle’s
upholstery and clean the vehicle’s glass can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to home furnishings may also
transfer color to the vehicle’s interior.
Do not clean the vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to the vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
the interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
5-100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clean:
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per
gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use
only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage the vehicle’s interior.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
Fabric/Carpet
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
any soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or
club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much
of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
5-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they can
alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of the leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on leather.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on the
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{ CAUTION:
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. It may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they might not be able
to provide adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use
spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many
commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to
preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of the
interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone
5-102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required. See
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer
than 12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that
it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it
on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-103.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that
are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives,
as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on
the vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
from your dealer/retailer. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
5-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Finish Care
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, chrome polish may be used on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on the vehicle.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle garaged or covered whenever
possible.
5-104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because they could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Notice: Driving the vehicle through an automatic
car wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes, could damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not be
covered by the warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive
polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that contain
acid on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the wheel(s). The repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Use
only approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish
and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always
wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces
on the vehicle.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
5-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sheet Metal Damage
Underbody Maintenance
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle
warranty.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing system
can do this.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification
This label is on the inside of the glove box. It is
very helpful if you ever need to order parts. The label
has the following information:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
the vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty. Some add-on electrical
equipment can keep other components from
working as they should.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
your vehicle’s engine code.
Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery, even if
the vehicle is not operating.
5-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing Your
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem, have
it fixed.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can be temporarily
borrowed from another fuse location, if a fuse goes out.
Replace the fuse as soon as you can.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. If the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool
down period, protecting the circuit until the problem
is fixed or goes away.
5-108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The instrument panel fuse
block access door is
located on the driver side
edge of the instrument
panel.
Pull off the cover to access the fuse block.
The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown.
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
Rear Seats
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Steering Wheel Controls Backlight
Driver Door Module
Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn
Signal
5
6
7
Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp
Instrument Panel Back Lighting
5-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
21
22
23
24
Usage
Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature)
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Rear Wiper
Cooled Seats
Driver Seat Module, Remote
Keyless Entry System
Passenger Side Turn Signal,
Stoplamp
Passenger Door Module, Driver
Unlock
Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature)
Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature)
Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted
Stoplamp
8
9
10
11
25
26
Driver Power Door Lock (Unlock
Feature)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Rear Climate Controls
Power Mirror
Body Control Module (BCM)
Accessory Power Outlets
Interior Lamps
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Driver Side Power Window Circuit
Breaker
LT DR
Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature)
Rear Seat Entertainment
Harness
Connector
Usage
LT DR
BODY
BODY
Driver Door Harness Connection
Harness Connector
Harness Connector
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist,
Power Liftgate
20
5-110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Harness
Usage
Connector
The center instrument panel fuse block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3
HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2
HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1
Top View
Special Equipment Option Upfitter
Harness Connector
SEO/UPFITTER
Circuit Breaker
Usage
Passenger Side Power Window
Circuit Breaker
CB1
CB2
CB3
CB4
Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker
Driver Seat Circuit Breaker
Rear Sliding Window
Harness
Usage
Connector
BODY 2
BODY 1
BODY 3
Body Harness Connector 2
Body Harness Connector 1
Body Harness Connector 3
5-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the
cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Underhood Fuse Block
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
5-112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
sage
6
7
Trailer Brake Controller
Front Washer
8
Oxygen Sensors
9
Antilock Brakes System 2
Trailer Back-up Lamps
Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp
Engine Control Module (Battery)
10
11
12
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Right Side)
13
Transmission Control Module
(Battery)
Vehicle Back-up Lamps
Passenger Side Low-Beam
Headlamp
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Air Conditioning Compressor
Oxygen Sensors
Transmission Controls (Ignition)
Fuel Pump
Fuel System Control Module
Headlamp Washers
Rear Windshield Washer
Fuses
sage
1
Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Electronic Stability Suspension
Control, Automatic Level Control
Exhaust
Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp
Engine Controls
2
3
4
Engine Control Module, Throttle
Control
Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils
(Left Side)
5
24
5-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
25
26
27
28
sage
Trailer Park Lamps
Driver Side Park Lamps
Passenger Side Park Lamps
Fog Lamps
Fuses
sage
Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise
Control
Liftgate Release
Airbag System (Battery)
Instrument Panel Cluster
NOT USED
Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition)
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Rear Defogger
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
29
Horn
Passenger Side High-Beam
Headlamp
Daytime Running Lamps
Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp
Daytime Running Lights 2
Sunroof
30
31
32
33
34
Heated Mirrors
SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent
System
Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power
Outlet
35
53
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Windshield Wiper
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Relay, SEO Upfitter Usage
Climate Controls (Ignition)
Engine Control Module, Secondary
Fuel Pump (Ignition)
54
55
56
SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery)
Electric Adjustable Pedals
Climate Controls (Battery)
Airbag System (Ignition)
Amplifier
Audio System
5-114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Relays
FAN HI
FAN LO
Usage
Cooling Fan High Speed
Cooling Fan Low Speed
Cooling Fan Control
Low-Beam Headlamp
Front Fog Lamps
Air Conditioning Compressor
Starter
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
Cooling Fan 1
Automatic Level Control Compressor
Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System
Cooling Fan 2
Antilock Brake System 1
Starter
FAN CNTRL
HDLP LO/HID
FOG LAMP
A/C CMPRSR
STRTR
PWR/TRN
FUEL PMP
PRK LAMP
Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes)
Left Bussed Electrical Center 1
Electric Running Boards
Heated Windshield Washer System
Four-Wheel Drive System
Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery
Power)
Powertrain
Fuel Pump
Parking Lamps
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
RUN/CRANK Switched Power
68
69
70
71
72
Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1
Climate Control Blower
Power Liftgate Module
Left Bussed Electrical Center 2
5-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
5.3L V8, 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel and 6.0L V8
Engine Oil with Filter
16.8 qt
15.9 L
5.3L V8, 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel, 6.0L V8
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid
6.0 qt†
31.5 gal
6.0 qt
5.7 L†
119.2 L
5.7 L
Transfer Case Fluid
1.6 qt
1.5 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 lb ft
190 Y
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper operating
range.
5-116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
5.3L with Active Fuel
Management™
J
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel
with Active Fuel
0
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
Management™ (Iron)
5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with
Active Fuel Management™
(Aluminum Block)
3
Automatic
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
6.0L V8 with Active Fuel
Management™
Y
5-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance Schedule
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep this vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
the vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from the vehicle. To help protect the
environment, and to keep the vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain the vehicle properly.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty
and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for
details.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help keep this vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive
it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the
time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use the
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive
it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
{ CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be
dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you can be
seriously injured. Do your own maintenance work
only if you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job. If you have
any doubt, see your dealer/retailer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing Your
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, have your dealer/retailer do
these jobs.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for service, trained
and supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
on page 5-6.
To purchase service information, see Service
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be checked, when to check it, and what
can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good
condition.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
service the vehicle within 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since the last service. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life
Oil Life System and resetting the system.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-15. When the vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections are
required. Required services are described in the
following for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”
Generally, it is recommended that the first service be
Maintenance I, the second service be Maintenance II,
and then alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II may
be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
displays, service is required for the vehicle. Have the
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the
next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message displays within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message displays
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 6-10.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
page 5-19.
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (normal service).
Change transfer case fluid (severe
service). See footnotes (g) and (n).
•
•
•
•
Change transfer case fluid (normal
service). See footnote (g).
Inspect evaporative control system. An
Emission Control Service. See footnotes
† and (k).
•
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control
Service.
•
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service. See
footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An
Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts
as needed. To help ensure proper operation, a
pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap
and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-104 for more information.
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and
parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints
are maintenance-free.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly,
secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl,
midgate hinges, side storage box door hinges, tailgate
hinges, tailgate linkage, outer tailgate handle pivot
points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, locks, and folding seat
hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required
when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will
make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or
squeak.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose
is unobstructed, clear, and free of debris. During any
maintenance, if a power washer is used to clean
mud and dirt from the underbody, care should be taken
to not directly spray the transfer case output seals.
High pressure water can overcome the seals and
contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid
will decrease the life of the transfer case and should
be replaced.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition. Check
that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
(l) If driving regularly under dusty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
(n) Severe Service: Change transfer case fluid if the
vehicle is mainly used for trailer towing or driven in city
traffic, wet environment, or high ambient temperatures.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Owner Checks and Services
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-25.
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
vehicle safety, dependability, and emission control
performance. Your dealer/retailer can assist with these
checks and services.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Inspect the vehicle’s tires and make sure they are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
page 5-63. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by the vehicle
warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-69.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{ CAUTION:
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or
others could be injured.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked on a
level surface.
1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
on page 2-48.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the
vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your dealer/retailer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of P (Park) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transmission in N (Neutral),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in P (Park).
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
• To check the P (Park) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to P (Park). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission P (Park) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
{ CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
begin to move. You or others could be injured and
property could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll.
Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should
the vehicle begin to move.
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Support Gas Strut Service
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Visually inspect gas strut for signs of wear, corrosion,
cracks, loss of lubricant, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of gas strut. If necessary, replace
with genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Underbody Flushing Service
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
Engine oil which meets GM
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
page 5-15.
Engine Oil
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-25.
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
Canada 89021186).
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline or
One-Piece
Propshaft
Spline
Power Steering
System
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in
Canada 10953511) or lubricant
meeting requirements of
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
(Two-Wheel
Drive with Auto.
Trans.)
GM 9985830.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Chassis Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Hinges (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Outer Tailgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Handle Pivot (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021671, in
Canada 89021672).
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in
Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Points
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Front Axle
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Rear Axle
Synthetic Grease with
Weatherstrip Teflon, Superlube
Squeaks
Transfer Case
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner /Filter
Standard Filter
15908916*
15908915
A3086C*
A3085C
High Capacity Filter
Oil Filter
5.3L V8, 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel, 6.0L V8
Spark Plugs
89017524
12609877
25877402
PF48
41-985
—
5.3L V8, 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel, 6.0L V8
Wiper Blades
Front – 21.6 in (55.0 cm)
*15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, in the
U.S., call the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication Centre at
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
1-800-263-3777 (English), or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or the
general manager.
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet, remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility. That
is why we suggest following Step One first.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors
and your dealer are committed to making sure you
are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following
the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can
file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line
Program to enforce your rights.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding
vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event
that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and
2, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you
to be aware of its participation in a no-charge
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call the General Motors
Customer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777
(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of
owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program provides for the review of
the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter,
and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter.
The program is designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed in about
70 days. We believe our impartial program offers
advantages over courts in most jurisdictions because it
is informal, quick, and free of charge.
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
www.gm.ca where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center (U.S.) —
www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet
Information and services customized for your specific
vehicle — all in one convenient place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
• Digital owner manual, warranty information, and
more
• My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Online service and maintenance records
• Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide
• Exclusive privileges and offers
• My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as address
and phone number for each of your preferred GM
dealers/retailers.
• My Driveway: Access quick links to parts and
service estimates, check trade-in values, or
schedule a service appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your driveway profile.
• Recall notices for your specific vehicle
• OnStar® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings
summaries
Other Helpful Links:
Chevrolet − www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter
• FAQ
• My Preferences: Manage your profile and use tools
and forms with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gm.ca.
• Contact Us
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can
communicate with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
gmcanada.com
Customer Assistance Offices
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes
to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be
addressed to:
Overseas — Customer Assistance
United States — Customer Assistance
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
General Motors of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY
users call 1-800-263-3830.
Roadside Assistance Program
For U.S. purchased vehicles, call 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1-800-243-8872); (Text telephone (TTY):
1-888-889-2438).
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
For Canadian purchased vehicles, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance
When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following
information ready:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
Services Provided
• Emergency Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle
for the vehicle to get to the nearest service station.
• Lock-Out Service: Service is provided to unlock the
vehicle if you are locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar®. For security
reasons, the driver must present identification
before this service is given.
• Description of the problem
Coverage
Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles
(160 000 km), whichever comes first.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Road or Highway:
Tow to the nearest Chevrolet dealer for warranty
service, or if the vehicle was in a crash and cannot
be driven. Assistance is also given when the vehicle
is stuck in the sand, mud, or snow.
In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In
Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission
from the owner is not covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes
or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
• Flat Tire Change: Service is provided to change a
flat tire with the spare tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and properly inflated. It is
the owner’s responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not covered by the
warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or payment to an owner
or driver if they decide the claims are made too often,
or the same type of claim is made many times.
• Battery Jump Start: Service is provided to jump
start a dead battery.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: If your
trip is interrupted due to a warranty failure, incidental
expenses may be reimbursed during the 5 years/
100,000 miles (160 000 km) Powertrain warranty
period. Items considered are hotel, meals, and
rental car.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance: Must
be over 250 kilometres from where your trip was
started to qualify. General Motors of Canada Limited
requires pre-authorization, original detailed
Services Not Included in Roadside
Assistance
• Impound towing caused by violation of any laws.
• Legal fines.
receipts, and a copy of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received, the Roadside
Assistance advisor will help you make arrangements
and explain how to receive payment.
• Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
• Alternative Service: If assistance cannot be
provided right away, the Roadside Assistance
advisor may give you permission to get local
emergency road service. You will receive payment,
up to $100, after sending the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance. Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for parts and labor
for repairs not covered by the warranty are
the owner responsibility.
• Towing or services for vehicles driven on a
non-public road or highway.
Services Specific to Canadian
Purchased Vehicles
• Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately
$5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided
through this service.
• Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required.
• Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North
America are provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the most scenic route.
There is a limit of six requests per year. Additional
travel information is also available. Allow
three weeks for delivery.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for
service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Dealers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the dealer’s area.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain, and
hybrid specific warranty in both the U.S. and Canada.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Additional Program Information
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement
for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim
amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for information
regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of
fuel or other transportation costs.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every dealer. Please contact your dealer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Collision Damage Repair
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Collision Parts
Repair Facility
We recommend that you choose a collision repair facility
that meets your needs before you ever need collision
repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a collision repair
center with GM-trained technicians and state of the art
equipment, or be able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by
using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not
have been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit premature
durability/corrosion problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket parts are
not covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure related to such parts
are not covered by that warranty.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-7 for more information.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer/retailer, or General
Motors.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to safercar.gov; or write to:
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from safercar.gov.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional technical service
information needed to knowledgeably service General
Motors cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains
instructions to assist in the diagnosis and service of
your vehicle.
Reporting Safety Defects to General
Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a
situation like this, please notify General Motors.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or
1-800-263-7854 (French), or write:
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 (U.S.) plus processing fee
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available
for current and past model GM vehicles. To request
an order form, specify year and model name of
the vehicle.
Your GM vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
GM will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of GM’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or, as required by
law. Data that GM collects or receives may also be used
for GM research needs or may be made available to
others for research purposes, where a need is shown
and the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner.
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
7-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar®
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in GM vehicles does not use
or record personal information or link with any other
GM system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
7-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System (cont.)
Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-77
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................................ 5-8
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
Safety Belt Reminders .................................. 3-31
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts (cont.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service (cont.)
Storage Areas (cont.)
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
